7169 lines
306 KiB
Plaintext
7169 lines
306 KiB
Plaintext
# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
|
||
# Copyright (C) 2015-TODAY, Odoo S.A.
|
||
# This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package.
|
||
# FIRST AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
|
||
#
|
||
# Translators:
|
||
# Gennady Marchenko <gennadym@gmail.com>, 2020
|
||
# Viktor Pogrebniak <vp@aifil.ru>, 2020
|
||
# Максим Дронь <dronmax@gmail.com>, 2020
|
||
# Collex100, 2020
|
||
# Irina Fedulova <istartlin@gmail.com>, 2020
|
||
# Ekaterina <nawsikaya@bk.ru>, 2020
|
||
# Martin Trigaux, 2020
|
||
# Ivan Yelizariev <yelizariev@itpp.dev>, 2020
|
||
# Sergey Vilizhanin, 2020
|
||
#
|
||
#, fuzzy
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 14.0\n"
|
||
"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
|
||
"POT-Creation-Date: 2021-02-04 11:02+0100\n"
|
||
"PO-Revision-Date: 2020-09-22 14:41+0000\n"
|
||
"Last-Translator: Sergey Vilizhanin, 2020\n"
|
||
"Language-Team: Russian (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/ru/)\n"
|
||
"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
|
||
"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
|
||
"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
|
||
"Language: ru\n"
|
||
"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : n%10>=2 && n%10<=4 && (n%100<12 || n%100>14) ? 1 : n%10==0 || (n%10>=5 && n%10<=9) || (n%100>=11 && n%100<=14)? 2 : 3);\n"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory.rst:5
|
||
msgid "Inventory"
|
||
msgstr "Склад"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Barcodes"
|
||
msgstr "Штрихкоды"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Daily Operations"
|
||
msgstr "Операции за день"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Process to an Inventory Adjustment with Barcodes"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To process an inventory adjustment by using barcodes, you first need to open"
|
||
" the *Barcode* app. Then, from the application, click on *Inventory "
|
||
"Adjustments*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:13
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you want to fully work with barcodes, you can download the sheet "
|
||
"*Commands for Inventory*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:16
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once you have clicked on *Inventory Adjustments*, Odoo will automatically "
|
||
"create one. Note that, if you work with multi-location, you first need to "
|
||
"specify in which location the inventory adjustment takes place."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:24
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you don’t work with multi-location, you will be able to scan the "
|
||
"different products you want to include in the inventory adjustment."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:31
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you have 5 identical articles, scan it 5 times or use the keyboard to set"
|
||
" the quantity."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:34
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Besides using the barcode scanner, you can also manually add a product if "
|
||
"necessary. To do so, click on *Add Product* and fill the information in "
|
||
"manually."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:44
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When you have scanned all the items of the location, validate the inventory "
|
||
"manually or scan the *Validate* barcode."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:3
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/cancel_order.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/delivery_countries.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview.rst:3
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:6
|
||
msgid "Overview"
|
||
msgstr "Обзор"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"There are different situations in which barcode nomenclatures can be useful."
|
||
" A well-known use case is the one of a point of sale which sells products in"
|
||
" bulk, in which the customers will scale their products themselves and get "
|
||
"the printed barcode to stick on the product. This barcode will contain the "
|
||
"weight of the product and help compute the price accordingly."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:13
|
||
msgid "Create a Barcode Nomenclature"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:15
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Odoo supports Barcode Nomenclatures, which determine the mapping and "
|
||
"interpretation of the encoded information. You can configure your barcode "
|
||
"nomenclature being in :doc:`Developer mode "
|
||
"<../../../general/developer_mode/activate>`. To do so, go to "
|
||
":menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Barcode Nomenclature`."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:20
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can create a barcode nomenclature from there, and then add a line to "
|
||
"create your first rule."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:26
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The first step is to specify the **rule name**, for example Weight Barcode "
|
||
"with 3 Decimals. You then have to specify the type for barcode nomenclature,"
|
||
" in our case it will be Weighted Product."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:33
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The Barcode Pattern is a regular expression that defines the structure of "
|
||
"the barcode. In this example 21 defines the products on which the rule will "
|
||
"be applied, those are the numbers by which the product barcode should start."
|
||
" The 5 “dots” are the following numbers of the product barcode and are there"
|
||
" simply to identify the product in question. The “N” define a number and the"
|
||
" “D” define the decimals."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:40
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The encoding allows to specify the barcode encoding on which the rule should"
|
||
" be applied."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:44
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can define different rules and order their priority thanks to the "
|
||
"sequence. The first rule which matches the scanned barcode will be applied."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:49
|
||
msgid "Configure your Product"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:51
|
||
msgid "The barcode of the product should start by “21”;"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:52
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The 5 “dots” are the other numbers of your product barcode, allowing to "
|
||
"identify the product;"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:53
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The barcode should contain 0’s where you did defined D’s or N’s. In our case"
|
||
" we need to set 5 zeros because we configured “21…..{NNDDD}”;"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:54
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In EAN-13, the last number is a check number, use an EAN13 generator to know"
|
||
" which digit it should be in your case."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:59
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In case you weight 1,5 Kg of pasta, the balance will print you the following"
|
||
" barcode 2112345015002. If you scan this barcode in your POS or when "
|
||
"receiving products in your barcode application, Odoo will automatically "
|
||
"create a new line for the Pasta product for a quantity of 1.5 Kg. For the "
|
||
"point of sale, a price depending on the quantity will also be computed."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:70
|
||
msgid "Rule Types"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:72
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Priced Product**: allows you to identify the product and specify its "
|
||
"price, used in POS."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:73
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Discounted Product**: allows you to create one barcode per applied "
|
||
"discount. You can then scan your product in the POS and then scan the "
|
||
"discount barcode, discount will be applied on the normal price of the "
|
||
"product."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:74
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Weighted Product**: allows you to identify the product and specify its "
|
||
"weight, used in both POS (in which the price is computed based on the "
|
||
"weight) and in inventory."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:75
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Client**: allows you to identify the customer, for example used with "
|
||
"loyalty program."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:76
|
||
msgid "**Cashier**: allows you to identify the cashier when entering the POS."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:77
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Location**: allows you to identify the location on a transfer when multi-"
|
||
"location is activated."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:78
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Package**: allows you to identify packages on a transfer when packages are"
|
||
" activated."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:79
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Lot**: allows you to identify the lot number of a product on a transfer."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:80
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Credit Card**: doesn’t need manual modification, exists for data from the "
|
||
"Mercury module."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:81
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Unit Product**: allows you to identify a product for both POS and "
|
||
"transfers."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:84
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When the barcode pattern contains .*, it means that it can contain any "
|
||
"number of characters, those characters being any number."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Process to Transfers"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:6
|
||
msgid "Simple Transfers"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To process a transfer from the *Barcode* app, the first step is to go to "
|
||
"*Operations*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:14
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Then, you have the choice to either enter an existing transfer, by going to "
|
||
"the corresponding operation type and manually selecting the one you want to "
|
||
"enter, or by scanning the barcode of the transfer."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:24
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"From there, you will be able to scan the products that are part of the "
|
||
"existing transfer and/or add new products to this transfer. Once all the "
|
||
"products have been scanned, you can validate the transfer to proceed with "
|
||
"the stock moves."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:33
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you have different storage locations in your warehouse, you can add "
|
||
"additional steps for the different operation types."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:37
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:50
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:45
|
||
msgid "Receipts"
|
||
msgstr "Приходы"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:39
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When receiving a product in stock, you need to scan its barcode in order to "
|
||
"identify it in the system. Once done, you can either make it enter the main "
|
||
"location of the transfer, for example WH/Stock, or scan a location barcode "
|
||
"to make it enter a sub-location of the main location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:48
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you want the product to enter WH/Stock in our example, you can simply "
|
||
"scan the next product."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:52
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Delivery Orders"
|
||
msgstr "Заказы на доставку"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:54
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When delivering a product, you have to scan the source location if it is "
|
||
"different than the one initially set on the transfer. Then, you can start "
|
||
"scanning the products that are delivered from this specific location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:62
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once the different products have been scanned, you have the possibility to "
|
||
"scan another location, such as WH/Stock, and another page will be added to "
|
||
"your delivery order. You can move from one to the other thanks to the "
|
||
"*Previous* and *Next* buttons."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:70
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, you can validate your transfer. To do so, click on *Next* until you "
|
||
"reach the last page of the transfer. There, you will be able to validate it."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:78
|
||
msgid "Internal Transfers"
|
||
msgstr "Внутренние перемещения"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:80
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When realizing an internal transfer with multi-location, you first have to "
|
||
"scan the source location of the product. Then, you can scan the product in "
|
||
"itself, before having to scan the barcode of the destination location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:85
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If the source and destination of the internal transfers are already correct,"
|
||
" you don’t need to scan them."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:89
|
||
msgid "Transfers with Tracked Products"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:91
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you work with products tracked by lot/serial numbers, you have two ways "
|
||
"of working:"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:94
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you work with serial/lot numbers taking all products into consideration, "
|
||
"you can scan the barcode of the lot/serial number and Odoo will increase the"
|
||
" quantity of the product, setting its lot/serial number."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:99
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you have the same lot/serial number for different products, you can work "
|
||
"by scanning the product barcode first, and then the barcode of the "
|
||
"lot/serial number."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Create a Transfer from Scratch"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To create a transfer from the *Barcode* application, you first need to print"
|
||
" the operation type barcodes. To do so, you can download the *Stock barcode "
|
||
"sheet* from the home page of the app."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:12
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once done, you can scan the one for which you want to create a new document."
|
||
" Then, an empty document will be created and you will be able to scan your "
|
||
"products to populate it."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Setup"
|
||
msgstr "Установка"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Set up your barcode scanner"
|
||
msgstr "Установка сканера штрих-кода"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Getting started with barcode scanning in Odoo is fairly easy. Yet, a good "
|
||
"user experience relies on an appropriate hardware setup. This guide will "
|
||
"help you through the task of choosing and configuring the barcode scanner."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Начало работы со сканированием штрих-кодов в Odoo достаточно легкий. Тем не "
|
||
"менее, хороший пользовательский опыт возлагается на соответствующую "
|
||
"установку аппаратного обеспечения. Это пособие поможет вам решить задачу "
|
||
"выбора и настройки сканера штрих-кодов."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:11
|
||
msgid "Find the barcode scanner that suits your needs"
|
||
msgstr "Найдите сканер штрих-кода, который соответствует вашим потребностям"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:13
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The 3 recommended type of barcode scanners to work with the Odoo "
|
||
"**Inventory** and **Barcode Scanning** apps are the **USB scanner**, **the "
|
||
"bluetooth scanner** and the **mobile computer scanner**."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Есть три рекомендованные сканеры штрихкодов для работы в програмами ** "
|
||
"Состав ** Odoo и ** Сканер штрих-кода ** - ** сканер USB **, ** сканер "
|
||
"Bluetooth ** и ** мобильный сканер **."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:20
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you scan products at a computer location, the **USB scanner** is the way "
|
||
"to go. Simply plug it in the computer to start scanning. Just make sure when"
|
||
" you buy it that the scanner is compatible with your keyboard layout or can "
|
||
"be configured to be so."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Если вы сканируете товары на компьютере, это путь к ** сканера USB **. "
|
||
"Просто подключите его к компьютеру, чтобы начать сканирование. Убедитесь, "
|
||
"когда вы покупаете его, сканер совместим с раскладкой клавиатуры или может "
|
||
"быть настроен таким образом."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:25
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The **bluetooth scanner** can be paired with a smartphone or a tablet and is"
|
||
" a good choice if you want to be mobile but don't need a big investment. An "
|
||
"approach is to log in Odoo on you smartphone, pair the bluetooth scanner "
|
||
"with the smartphone and work in the warehouse with the possibility to check "
|
||
"your smartphone from time to time and use the software 'manually'."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:32
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"For heavy use, the **mobile computer scanner** is the handiest solution. It "
|
||
"consists of a small computer with a built-in barcode scanner. This one can "
|
||
"turn out to be a very productive solution, however you need to make sure "
|
||
"that is is capable of running Odoo smoothly. The most recent models using "
|
||
"Android + Google Chrome or Windows + Internet Explorer Mobile should do the "
|
||
"job. However, due to the variety of models and configurations on the market,"
|
||
" it is essential to test it first."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:42
|
||
msgid "Configure your barcode scanner"
|
||
msgstr "Настройка сканера штрих-кодов"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:45
|
||
msgid "Keyboard layout"
|
||
msgstr "Раскладка клавиатуры"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:50
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"An USB barcode scanner needs to be configured to use the same keyboard "
|
||
"layout as your operating system. Otherwise, your scanner won't translate "
|
||
"characters correctly (replacing a 'A' with a 'Q' for example). Most scanners"
|
||
" are configured by scanning the appropriate barcode in the user manual."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Сканер штрих-кода USB должен быть настроен таким образом, чтобы использовать"
|
||
" такую же раскладку клавиатуры как операционная система. В противном случае "
|
||
"ваш сканер не будет правильно переводить символы (например, заменив "
|
||
""A" на "Q"). Большинство сканеров настроены путем "
|
||
"сканирования соответствующего штрих-кода в руководстве пользователя."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:57
|
||
msgid "Automatic carriage return"
|
||
msgstr "Автоматический возврат каретки"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:59
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"By default, Odoo has a 50 milliseconds delay between each successive scan "
|
||
"(it helps avoid accidental double scanning). If you want to suppress this "
|
||
"delay, you can configure your scanner to insert a carriage return at the end"
|
||
" of each barcode. This is usually the default configuration and can be "
|
||
"explicitly configured by scanning a specific barcode in the user manual ('CR"
|
||
" suffix ON', 'Apply Enter for suffix', etc.)."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"По умолчанию Odoo имеет задержку 50 миллисекунд между каждым последующим "
|
||
"сканированием (это помогает избежать случайного двойного сканирования). Если"
|
||
" вы хотите уменьшить эту задержку, вы можете настроить сканер, чтобы "
|
||
"вставить возврата тары в конце каждого штрих-кода. Обычно это настройкой по "
|
||
"умолчанию и может быть явным образом настроено сканирование определенного "
|
||
"штрих-кода в руководстве ( "суффикс CR на", "Применить "
|
||
"введение для суффикса" и т.д.)."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Activate the Barcodes in Odoo"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The barcode scanning features can save you a lot of time usually lost "
|
||
"switching between the keyboard, the mouse and the scanner. Properly "
|
||
"attributing barcodes to products, pickings locations, etc. allows you to "
|
||
"work more efficiently by controlling the software almost exclusively with "
|
||
"the barcode scanner."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:12
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/delivery_countries.rst:12
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:37
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:13
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:9
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:50
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:18
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:19
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:30
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:16
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:21
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/integrating_landed_costs.rst:15
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:14
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:10
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:10
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:16
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:15
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:13
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:17
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:14
|
||
msgid "Configuration"
|
||
msgstr "Настройка"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:14
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To use this feature, you first need to activate the *Barcode* functionality "
|
||
"via :menuselection:`Inventory --> Settings --> Barcode Scanner`. Once you "
|
||
"have ticked the feature, you can hit save."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:22
|
||
msgid "Set Product Barcodes"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:24
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can easily assign barcodes to your different products via the "
|
||
"*Inventory* app. To do so, go to :menuselection:`Settings --> Configure "
|
||
"Products Barcodes`."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:30
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Then, you have the possibility to assign barcodes to your products directly "
|
||
"at creation on the product form."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:40
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Be careful to add barcodes directly on the product variants and not on the "
|
||
"template product. Otherwise, you won’t be able to differentiate them."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:45
|
||
msgid "Set Locations Barcodes"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:47
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you manage multiple locations, you will find useful to attribute a "
|
||
"barcode to each location and stick it on the location. You can configure the"
|
||
" locations barcodes in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> "
|
||
"Locations`."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:58
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can easily print the barcode you allocate to the locations via the "
|
||
"*Print* menu."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:62
|
||
msgid "Barcode Formats"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:64
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Most retail products use EAN-13 barcodes. They cannot be made up without "
|
||
"proper authorization. You must pay the International Article Numbering "
|
||
"Association a fee in exchange for an EAN code sequence."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:68
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Still, as Odoo supports any string as a barcode, you can always define your "
|
||
"own barcode format for internal use."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Warehouse Management"
|
||
msgstr "Управление складом"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/cancel_order.rst:3
|
||
msgid "How do I cancel a delivery order?"
|
||
msgstr "Как отменить заказ на доставку?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/cancel_order.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Odoo gives you the possibility to cancel a delivery method whether it has "
|
||
"been validated to fast, it needs to be modified or for any other reason."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Odoo дает вам возможность отменить заказ на доставку, независимо от того, "
|
||
"оно было быстро проверено, его нужно изменить или по иным причинам."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/cancel_order.rst:12
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Some carriers are more flexible than others, so make sure to cancel your "
|
||
"delivery order as fast as possible if it needs to be done so you don't have "
|
||
"any bad surprise."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Некоторые перевозчики являются более гибкими, чем другие, поэтому "
|
||
"обязательно отмените заказ на доставку быстрее, если это нужно сделать, "
|
||
"чтобы у вас не было никаких неприятных сюрпризов."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/cancel_order.rst:17
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:26
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:107
|
||
msgid "Sale process"
|
||
msgstr "процесс продажи"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/cancel_order.rst:19
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Go to the **Sales** module, click on **Sales** and then on **Sales Order**. "
|
||
"Then click on the sale order you want to cancel."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Перейдите к модулю ** Продажи ** нажмите ** Продажи **, а затем - ** Заказ "
|
||
"на продажу **. Затем нажмите на заказ на продажу, которое нужно отменить."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/cancel_order.rst:25
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Click on the **Delivery** button, in the upper right corner of the sale "
|
||
"order."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Нажмите кнопку ** Доставка **, в верхнем правом углу заказ на продажу."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/cancel_order.rst:31
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, click on the **Additional info** tab and you will see that next to the "
|
||
"**Carrier Tracking Reference**, there is a **Cancel** button. Click on it to"
|
||
" cancel the delivery."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Теперь откройте вкладку ** Дополнительная информация **, и вы увидите, что "
|
||
"рядом с ** Проекты перевозчика **, есть кнопка ** Отменить **. Нажмите на "
|
||
"нее, чтобы отменить доставку."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/cancel_order.rst:38
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To make sure that your delivery is cancelled, check in the history, you will"
|
||
" receive the confirmation of the cancellation."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Чтобы убедиться, что ваша доставка отменена, зарегистрируйтесь в истории, и "
|
||
"получите подтверждение об отмене."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/delivery_countries.rst:3
|
||
msgid "How can I limit a delivery method to a certain number of countries?"
|
||
msgstr "Как ограничить способ доставки определенном количестве стран?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/delivery_countries.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"With Odoo, you can have different types of delivery methods, and you can "
|
||
"limit them to a certain number of countries."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"С помощью Odoo вы можете иметь различные способы доставки, и вы можете "
|
||
"ограничить их для определенного количества стран."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/delivery_countries.rst:14
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Go to the **Inventory** module, click on **Configuration** and then on "
|
||
"**Delivery Methods**."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"В модуле ** Состав ** перейдите к ** Настройка ** и нажмите ** Методы "
|
||
"доставки **."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/delivery_countries.rst:20
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Select the delivery method that you want to change, or create a new one."
|
||
msgstr "Выберите способ доставки, который нужно изменить, или создайте новый."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/delivery_countries.rst:25
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the **Destination** tab, choose the countries to which you want to apply "
|
||
"this delivery method."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"На вкладке ** Место назначения ** выберите страны, к которым нужно применить"
|
||
" этот метод доставки."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/delivery_countries.rst:28
|
||
msgid "Now, that this is done, Let's see the result."
|
||
msgstr "Теперь, давайте посмотрим, что сделано."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/delivery_countries.rst:30
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you go to the website, and you try to buy something, once you've entered "
|
||
"your details and you proceed to the payment, the website will propose you "
|
||
"only the delivery methods that apply to your shipping address."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Если вы переходите на сайт, и пытаетесь что-то купить, после введения своей "
|
||
"информации и перехода на платеж, сайт предложит вам только способы доставки,"
|
||
" которые применяются к вашей адреса доставки."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/delivery_countries.rst:39
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"This process doesn't work in backend. We assume that when you create a Sale "
|
||
"Order, you know which delivery method you can use since you created them."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Этот процесс не работает в бэкенд. Мы предполагаем, что когда вы создаете "
|
||
"заказ на продажу, вы знаете, какой метод доставки вы можете использовать с "
|
||
"момента их создания."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Send Products to Customers Directly from Suppliers (Drop-shipping)"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:6
|
||
msgid "What is Drop-Shipping?"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Drop-Shipping is a system that allows orders taken from your store to be "
|
||
"shipped straight from your supplier to your customer. On a usual delivery "
|
||
"system, products are sent from your supplier to your warehouse to be put in "
|
||
"stock and then shipped to your customers after ordering."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:13
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"With drop-shipping, no item is stocked. When a customer places an order in "
|
||
"your shop, the item is delivered straight from the supplier to the customer."
|
||
" Therefore, the product doesn't need to get through your warehouse."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:19
|
||
msgid "Points to be Considered while Implementing Drop-Shipping"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:24
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Use drop-shipping only for the products you can't or don't want to keep in "
|
||
"stock."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:22
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"One reason is that you'll always make smaller margins on items that are "
|
||
"drop-shipped, so you should keep it only for items that take up a lot of "
|
||
"space in your warehouse."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:30
|
||
msgid "Drop-shipping is best for niche products."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:27
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Chances are that products that are in high demand are being offered by large"
|
||
" suppliers at a fraction of the price you'll be able to charge, so using a "
|
||
"more costly shipping method won't be financially rewarding. But if your "
|
||
"product is unique, then it makes sense!"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:33
|
||
msgid "To protect your customers from bad experiences."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:33
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Test drop-shipping companies for yourself beforehand and list the best ones."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:37
|
||
msgid "Make sure time is not against you."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:36
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Drop-shipping should take a reasonable amount of time and surely not more "
|
||
"than it would have taken you to handle it all by yourself. It's also nice to"
|
||
" be able to provide your customers with a tracking number."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:44
|
||
msgid "Items have to be available from your supplier."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:40
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"It's good to know if the product you're selling is available upstream. If "
|
||
"you don't have that information, inform your customers that you don't hold "
|
||
"the item in stock and that it's subject to availability from a third party."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:47
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"For more information and insights about Drop-Shipping, you can read our "
|
||
"blog: `*What is drop-shipping and how to use it* <https://www.odoo.com/blog"
|
||
"/business-hacks-1/post/what-is-drop-shipping-and-how-to-use-it-250>`__."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:52
|
||
msgid "Configure Drop-Shipping"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:54
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Activate the functionality in the *Purchase* application by going to "
|
||
":menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:60
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Then, go to the *Inventory* app, in :menuselection:`Configuration --> "
|
||
"Settings` to activate the *Multi-Step Routes* feature. It will allow you to "
|
||
"make the *Route* field appear on the sale order lines to specify you send a "
|
||
"product via drop-shipping."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:68
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, in the *Sales* app, go to :menuselection:`Products --> Products`. "
|
||
"Select the product you would like to drop-ship and add a vendor pricelist "
|
||
"which contains the right supplier, via the purchase tab."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:76
|
||
msgid "Send Products from the Suppliers Directly to the Customers"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:78
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Create a *Sales Order* and add the product on which you just set the vendor."
|
||
" Add the *Route* field thanks to the widget on the right of the sale order "
|
||
"line. Now, you are able to specify that your products’ route is *Drop-"
|
||
"Shipping*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:89
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once the sale order is confirmed, Odoo automatically generates a *Request "
|
||
"for Quotation* for the supplier who will proceed to the drop-shipping. You "
|
||
"can find it in the *Purchase* app, with the sale order as *Source Document*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:97
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once this *Purchase Order* is confirmed, a *Receipt Order* is created and "
|
||
"linked to it. The source location is the vendor location and the destination"
|
||
" location is the customer location. Then, the product won’t go through your "
|
||
"own stock when you validate the dropship document."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:105
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can also easily access the dropship document directly from your "
|
||
"inventory dashboard."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:3
|
||
msgid "How to choose the right inventory flow to handle delivery orders?"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Как выбрать правильное перемещение запасов для обработки заказов на "
|
||
"доставку?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Depending on factors such as the type of items you sell, the size of your "
|
||
"warehouse, the number of orders you register everyday... the way you handle "
|
||
"deliveries to your customers can vary a lot."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"В зависимости от таких факторов, как тип товаров, которые вы продаете, "
|
||
"размер вашего склада, количество заказов, которые вы регистрируете каждый "
|
||
"день ... способ обработки заказов может сильно отличаться."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:9
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Odoo allows you to handle shipping from your warehouse in 3 different ways:"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Odoo позволяет обрабатывать доставку из своего состава тремя различными "
|
||
"способами:"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:12
|
||
msgid "**One step (shipping)**: Ship directly from stock"
|
||
msgstr "** Один шаг (доставка) **: отправьте непосредственно со склада"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:14
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Two steps (pick + ship)**: Bring goods to output location before shipping"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"** Два шага (комплектование + доставка) **: перенести товар к месту отгрузки"
|
||
" перед отправлением"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:17
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Three steps (pick + pack + ship)**: Make packages into a dedicated "
|
||
"location, then bring them to the output location for shipping"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"** Три шага (комплектование + упаковки + доставка) ** Сделайте пакеты в "
|
||
"выделенном месте, а затем переместите их в место отгрузки для доставки"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:20
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"For companies having a rather small warehouse and that do not require high "
|
||
"stock of items or don't sell perishable items, a one step shipping is the "
|
||
"simplest solution, as it does not require a lot of configuration and allows "
|
||
"to handle orders very quickly."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Для компаний, которые имеют достаточно небольшой склад и не требуют высокого"
|
||
" запаса товаров или не продают скоропортящиеся товары, простым является "
|
||
"доставка в один шаг, поскольку она не требует больших настроек и позволяет "
|
||
"обрабатывать заказы очень быстро."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:25
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Using inventory methods such as FIFO, LIFO and FEFO require to have at least"
|
||
" two steps to handle a shipment. The picking method will be determined by "
|
||
"the removal strategy, and the items removed will then be shipped to the "
|
||
"customer. This method is also interesting if you hold larger stocks and "
|
||
"especially when the items you stock are big in size."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Использование складских методов, таких как FIFO, LIFO и FEFO, требует как "
|
||
"минимум двух этапов для обработки отгрузки. Способ комплектования будет "
|
||
"определено стратегией удаления, а отдаленные товары затем будут отправлены "
|
||
"клиенту. Этот способ также интересен, если у вас есть большие запасы, и "
|
||
"особенно если вы большие размеры."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:31
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The three steps system becomes useful in more specific situations, the main "
|
||
"one being for handling very large stocks. The items are transferred to a "
|
||
"packing area, where they will be assembled by area of destination, and then "
|
||
"set to outbound trucks for final delivery to the customers."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Система трех шагов становится полезной в более конкретных ситуациях, "
|
||
"основными из которых являются обработка очень больших запасов. Товары "
|
||
"переносятся в зону упаковки, где их собирают по месту назначения, а затем "
|
||
"устанавливают на выходные грузы для конечной доставки заказчикам."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:40
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:53
|
||
msgid "One step flow"
|
||
msgstr "Перемещение в один шаг"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:42
|
||
msgid "Please read documentation on :doc:`one_step`"
|
||
msgstr "Пожалуйста, прочитайте документацию о: doc: `one_step`"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:45
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:58
|
||
msgid "Two steps flow"
|
||
msgstr "Способ в два этапа"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:47
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:60
|
||
msgid "Please read documentation on :doc:`two_steps`"
|
||
msgstr "Пожалуйста, прочитайте документацию о: doc: `two_steps`"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:50
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:63
|
||
msgid "Three steps flow"
|
||
msgstr "Способ в три этапа"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:52
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:65
|
||
msgid "Please read documentation on :doc:`three_steps`"
|
||
msgstr "Пожалуйста, прочитайте документацию о: doc: `three_steps`"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:3
|
||
msgid "How can I change the label type?"
|
||
msgstr "Как можно изменить тип накладной?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"With Odoo, you can choose among different types of labels for your delivery "
|
||
"orders. Follow the steps below and give an appropriate label type to your "
|
||
"delivery."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"С помощью Odoo вы можете выбрать различные типы накладных для заказов на "
|
||
"доставку. Следуйте следующие действия и предоставьте соответствующий тип "
|
||
"накладной для доставки."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:15
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the **Inventory** module, Go to **Configuration** and click on **Delivery"
|
||
" methods**."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"В модуле ** Состав **, перейдите к ** Настройка ** и нажмите ** Методы "
|
||
"доставки **."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:18
|
||
msgid "Choose a delivery method and then click on **Edit**."
|
||
msgstr "Выберите способ доставки и нажмите кнопку ** Редактировать **."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:23
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the **Pricing** tab, under **Fedex label stock type**, you can choose one"
|
||
" of the label types available. The availability will vary depending on the "
|
||
"carrier."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"На вкладке ** Цена **, под названием ** Складской тип накладной Fedex **, "
|
||
"можно выбрать один из доступных типов накладной. Доступность может "
|
||
"отличаться в зависимости от перевозчика."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:30
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once this is done, you can see the result if you go to the Sales module and "
|
||
"you create a new sale order."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"После этого вы можете увидеть результат, если вы перейдете к модулю продажу,"
|
||
" и вы создадите новый заказ на продажу."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:33
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"As you confirm the sale and validate the delivery with the carrier for which"
|
||
" you have modified the label type, The label will appear in your history."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Когда вы подтвердите продажи и подтвердите доставку перевозчиком, для "
|
||
"которого вы изменили тип накладной, накладная появится в вашей истории."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:46
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The default label type is paper letter, and if you choose the label type "
|
||
"bottom half for example, here is the difference :"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Тип накладной по умолчанию - бумажный лист, и если вы выберете, например, "
|
||
"нижнюю половину типа накладной, она будет отличаться:"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Process Delivery Orders in one Step (Shipping)"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"There is no configuration needed to deliver in one step. The default "
|
||
"outgoing shipments are configured to be directly delivered from the stock to"
|
||
" the customers."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:9
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"However, if advanced routes have been activated and you set another shipping"
|
||
" configuration on your warehouse, you can set it back to the one-step "
|
||
"delivery configuration. Go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration "
|
||
"--> Warehouses` and edit the warehouse in question."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:14
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Then, choose *Deliver goods directly* as your *Outgoing Shipments* strategy."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:21
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:45
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:47
|
||
msgid "Create a Sales Order"
|
||
msgstr "Создайте заказ на продажу"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:23
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the *Sales* application, create a quotation with some storable products "
|
||
"to deliver and confirm it."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:26
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Notice that we now see 1 delivery associated with this *sales order* in the "
|
||
"stat button above the sales order. If you click on the 1 Delivery stat "
|
||
"button, you should now see your delivery order."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:34
|
||
msgid "Process a Delivery"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:36
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can also find the *delivery order* directly from the *Inventory* "
|
||
"application. In the dashboard, you can click the *1 TO PROCESS* button under"
|
||
" the Delivery Orders Kanban card."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:43
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Enter the picking that you want to process. You will be able to click on "
|
||
"*Validate* to complete the move if you have products in stock."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:49
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once you *Validate* the delivery order, the products leave your *WH/Stock "
|
||
"location* and are moved to the *Customer location*. You can easily see that "
|
||
"the delivery took place thanks to the status of the document which is now "
|
||
"*Done*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Deliver Products in Packages"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In Odoo, you have the possibility to deliver your products in different "
|
||
"packages, depending on the volume and or weight of your products."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:11
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"First, you need to activate the *Delivery Packages* feature in the "
|
||
":menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:18
|
||
msgid "Proceed to a Delivery"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:20
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, you can create a planned delivery with some products in it. You will "
|
||
"have the possibility to create new packages and assign them to the stock "
|
||
"move lines."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:27
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Then, you can define the package type from this window. Once the delivery "
|
||
"order is validated, you can retrieve which products have been included in "
|
||
"the package."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:34
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"A button will appear at the delivery stage, allowing you to find all the "
|
||
"packages which were part of the delivery order."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:44
|
||
msgid "Use the Put in Pack button"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:46
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Another way to put products in packs is to use the *Put in Pack* button. It "
|
||
"will automatically assign a pack to the number of products which is set as "
|
||
"*Done* and duplicate the stock move line if necessary."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:53
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Then, you will be able to update the different packages created this way, "
|
||
"directly via the *Packages* button."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Process Delivery Orders in three Steps (Pick + Pack + Ship)"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When an order goes to the shipping department for final delivery, Odoo is "
|
||
"set up by default to utilize a one-step operation: once all goods are "
|
||
"available, they are able to be shipped in a single delivery order. However, "
|
||
"that process may not reflect reality and your company could require more "
|
||
"steps before shipping."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:11
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"With the delivery in 3 steps (Pick + Pack + Ship), the items will be picked "
|
||
"to be transferred to a packing area. Then, they will be moved to an output "
|
||
"location before being effectively shipped to the customers."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:16
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:15
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:18
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:19
|
||
msgid "Activate Multi-Step Routes"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:18
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:17
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The first step is to allow using *multi-step routes*. Indeed, routes provide"
|
||
" a mechanism to chain different actions together. In this case, we will "
|
||
"chain the picking step to the shipping step."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:22
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:21
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To allow *multi-step routes*, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> "
|
||
"Configuration --> Settings` and activate the option. Note that activating "
|
||
"*Multi-Step Routes* will also activate *Storage Locations*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:30
|
||
msgid "Configure Warehouse for Delivery in 3 Steps"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:32
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once *Multi-Step Routes* has been activated, you can go to "
|
||
":menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Warehouse` and enter the "
|
||
"warehouse which will use delivery in 3 steps. You can then select the option"
|
||
" *Pack goods, send goods in output and then deliver (3 steps)* for *Outgoing"
|
||
" Shipments*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:40
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Activating this option will lead to the creation of two new locations, "
|
||
"*Output* and *Packing Zone*. If you want to rename it go to "
|
||
":menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Locations`, *Select* the one"
|
||
" you want to rename and update its name."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:47
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the *Sales* application, you can create a quotation with some storable "
|
||
"products to deliver. Once you confirm the quotation, three pickings will be "
|
||
"created and automatically linked to your sale order."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:54
|
||
msgid "If you click the button, you should now see three different pickings:"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:56
|
||
msgid "The first one with a reference PICK to designate the picking process,"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:58
|
||
msgid "The second one with the reference PACK that is the packing process,"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:60
|
||
msgid "The last one with a reference OUT to designate the shipping process."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:66
|
||
msgid "Process the Picking, Packing, and Delivery"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:68
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The picking operation is the first one to be processed and has a *Ready* "
|
||
"status while the other ones are *Waiting Another Operation*. The Packing "
|
||
"operation will become *Ready* as soon as the picking one is marked as done."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:73
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:71
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can enter the picking operation from here, or access it through the "
|
||
"inventory dashboard."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:79
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:77
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In case you have the product in stock, it has automatically been reserved "
|
||
"and you can simply validate the picking document."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:85
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once the picking has been validated, the packing order is ready to be "
|
||
"processed. Thanks to the fact that the documents are chained, the products "
|
||
"which have been previously picked are automatically reserved on the packing "
|
||
"order which can be directly validated."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:96
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once the packing has been validated, the delivery order is ready to be "
|
||
"processed. Here again, it is directly ready to be validated in order to "
|
||
"transfer the products to the customer location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Process Delivery Orders in two Steps (Pick + Ship)"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When an order goes to the shipping department for final delivery, Odoo is "
|
||
"set up by default to utilize a one-step operation: once all goods are "
|
||
"available, they are able to be shipped in a single delivery order."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:9
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"However, your company's business process may have one or more steps that "
|
||
"happen before shipping. In the two steps process, the products which are "
|
||
"part of the delivery order are picked in the warehouse and brought to an "
|
||
"output location before being effectively shipped."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:29
|
||
msgid "Warehouse configuration"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:31
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once *Multi-Step Routes* has been activated, you can go to "
|
||
":menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Warehouse` and enter the "
|
||
"warehouse which will use delivery in 2 steps. You can then select the option"
|
||
" *Send goods in output and then deliver (2 steps)* for Outgoing Shipments."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:39
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Activating this option will lead to the creation of a new *Output* location."
|
||
" If you want to rename it go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration "
|
||
"--> Locations`, Select Output and update its name."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:49
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the *Sales* application, you can create a quotation with some storable "
|
||
"products to deliver. Once you confirm the quotation, two pickings will be "
|
||
"created and automatically linked to your sale order."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:56
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you click on the *2 Delivery* button, you should now see two different "
|
||
"pickings, one with a reference *PICK* to designate the picking process and "
|
||
"another one with a reference *OUT* to designate the shipping process."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:65
|
||
msgid "Process the Picking and the Delivery"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:67
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The picking operation is the first one to be processed and has a *Ready* "
|
||
"status while the delivery operation will only become *Ready* once the "
|
||
"picking operation has been marked as done."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:83
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once the picking has been validated, the delivery order is ready to be "
|
||
"processed. Thanks to the fact that the documents are chained, the products "
|
||
"which have been previously picked are automatically reserved on the delivery"
|
||
" order."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Incoming Shipments"
|
||
msgstr "Поступающие грузы"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:3
|
||
msgid "How to choose the right flow to handle receipts?"
|
||
msgstr "Как выбрать правильный способ для обработки товарных чеков?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Depending on factors such as the type of items you receive, the size of your"
|
||
" warehouse, the number of receipt you register everyday... the way you "
|
||
"handle receipts to your customers can vary a lot."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"В зависимости от факторов, таких как тип элементов, которые вы получаете, "
|
||
"размер вашего склада, номер квитанции, который вы регистрируете каждый день "
|
||
"... способ, которым вы обрабатываете квитанции своим клиентам, может сильно "
|
||
"отличаться."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:12
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Odoo allows you to handle receipts from your warehouse in 3 different ways:"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Odoo позволяет обрабатывать квитанции из своего состава тремя различными "
|
||
"способами:"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:15
|
||
msgid "**One step**: Receive goods directly in stock."
|
||
msgstr "** В один шаг **: получать товары прямо на складе."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:17
|
||
msgid "**Two steps**: Unload in input location then go to stock."
|
||
msgstr "** В двух шагах **: извлеките в место приема, выделите в состав."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:19
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Three steps**: Unload in input location, go through a quality control "
|
||
"before being admitted in stock."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"** В три шага **: извлеките в место приема, пройдите контроль качества, "
|
||
"прежде чем он будет принят на складе."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:22
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Odoo uses **routes** to define exactly how you will handle the different "
|
||
"receipt steps. The configuration is done at the level of the warehouse. In "
|
||
"standard, the reception is a one step process, but changing the "
|
||
"configuration can allow to have 2 or even 3 steps."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Odoo использует ** маршруты **, чтобы точно определить, как вы будете "
|
||
"обрабатывать различные этапы получения. Настройка выполняется на уровне "
|
||
"состава. Обычно прием происходит в один этап, но изменение настройки может "
|
||
"привести к процессу в 2 или даже 3 шага."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:27
|
||
msgid "The principles are the following:"
|
||
msgstr "Принципы следующие:"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:29
|
||
msgid "**One step**: You receive the goods directly in your stock."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"** В один шаг **: вы получаете товары непосредственно на вашем складе."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:31
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Two steps**: You receive the goods in an input area then transfer them "
|
||
"from input area to your stock. As long as the goods are not transferred in "
|
||
"your stock, they will not be available for further processing."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"** В двух шагах **: вы получаете товары в месте приема, после чего "
|
||
"перенесите их из зоны приема к вашему состава. Пока товары не будут переданы"
|
||
" на ваш склад, они не будут доступны для дальнейшей обработки."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:36
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Three steps**: In many companies, it is necessary to assess the received "
|
||
"good. The goal is to check that the products correspond to the quality "
|
||
"requirements agreed with the suppliers. Adding a quality control step in the"
|
||
" goods receipt process can become essential."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"** В три шага **: во многих компаниях необходимо оценить полученную пользу. "
|
||
"Цель заключается в проверке того, что товары соответствуют требованиям по "
|
||
"качеству, согласованному с поставщиками. Добавление этапа контроля качества "
|
||
"в процессе получения товаров может стать важным."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:42
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You receive the goods in an input area, then transfer them into quality area"
|
||
" for quality control. When your quality check process finishes then you can "
|
||
"move the goods from QC to stock. Of course, you may change the quantity and "
|
||
"only transfer to Stock the quantity that is valid and decide that you will "
|
||
"return the quantity that is not good."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Вы получаете товары в месте приема, затем передаете их в зону качества для "
|
||
"контроля качества. Когда процесс проверки качества заканчивается, вы можете "
|
||
"переместить товары из КЯ на склад. Конечно, вы можете изменить количество и "
|
||
"только перевести на склад действительное количество и решить, какую ненужную"
|
||
" количество вы вернете."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:55
|
||
msgid "This is the default configuration in Odoo."
|
||
msgstr "Это настройки по умолчанию в Odoo"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:68
|
||
msgid ":doc:`../delivery/inventory_flow`"
|
||
msgstr ":doc:`../delivery/inventory_flow`"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:69
|
||
msgid ":doc:`../../../purchase/advanced/analyze`"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Process a Receipt in one step (Receipt)"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"There is no configuration needed to receive in one step. The default "
|
||
"incoming shipments are configured to be directly received from the vendors "
|
||
"to the stock."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:9
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"However, if advanced routes have been activated and you set another incoming"
|
||
" configuration on your warehouse, you can set it back to the one-step "
|
||
"receipt configuration. To do so, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> "
|
||
"Warehouses` and edit the warehouse in question."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:14
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Set the *Incoming Shipments* option to *Receive goods directly (1 step)*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:21
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:50
|
||
msgid "Create a Purchase Order"
|
||
msgstr "Создайте заказ на покупку"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:23
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To create a *Request for Quotation*, go to the *Purchase* application and "
|
||
"click on *Create*. Then, add some storable products to receive and confirm "
|
||
"the *RfQ*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:27
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Notice that, now, we see 1 receipt associated with the purchase order you "
|
||
"just created. If you click on the button, you will see your receipt order."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:35
|
||
msgid "Process a Receipt"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:37
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can also fin the receipt directly from the *Inventory* app. When on the "
|
||
"dashboard, you can click the *1 TO PROCESS* button under the *Receipts* "
|
||
"Kanban card. Then, you will see your receipt."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:44
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, enter the picking that you want to process. You will be able to click "
|
||
"on *Validate* to complete the move directly as products coming from "
|
||
"suppliers are considered as being always available."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:51
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once you *Validate* the receipt, the products leave the *Supplier Location* "
|
||
"to enter your *WH/Stock Location*. You can easily see that the receipt took "
|
||
"place thanks to the status of the document, which is now *Done*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Process a Receipt in three steps (Input + Quality + Stock)"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Quality is essential for most companies. To make sure we maintain quality "
|
||
"throughout the supply chain, it only makes sense that we assess the quality "
|
||
"of the products received from suppliers. To do so, we will add a quality "
|
||
"control step."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:9
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Odoo uses routes to define how to handle the different receipt steps. "
|
||
"Configuration of those routes is done at the warehouse level. By default, "
|
||
"the reception is a one-step process, but it can also be configured to have "
|
||
"two-steps or three-steps processes."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:13
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The three-steps flow works as follows: you receive the goods in your "
|
||
"receiving area, then transfer them into a quality area for quality control "
|
||
"(QC). When the quality check is completed, the goods that match the QC "
|
||
"requirements are moved to stock"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:20
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The first step is to allow the use of *Multi-Step Routes*. Routes provide a "
|
||
"mechanism to chain different actions together. In this case, we will chain "
|
||
"the picking step to the shipping step."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:23
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To enable *Multi-Step Routes*, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> "
|
||
"Configuration --> Settings` and activate the option."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:31
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"By default, activating *Multi-Step Routes* also activates *Storage "
|
||
"Locations*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:35
|
||
msgid "Configure warehouse for receipt in 3-steps"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:37
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once *Multi-Step Routes* has been activated, go to :menuselection:`Inventory"
|
||
" --> Configuration --> Warehouse` and enter the warehouse which should work "
|
||
"with the 3-steps reception. Then, select *Receive goods in input, then "
|
||
"quality and then stock (3 steps)* for *Incoming Shipments*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:45
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Activating this option leads to the creation of two new locations: *Input* "
|
||
"and *Quality Control*. To rename them, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> "
|
||
"Configuration --> Locations` and select the one you want to rename."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:52
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To start the 3-steps reception process, create a *Request for Quotation* "
|
||
"from the *Purchase* app, add some storable products to it and confirm. Then,"
|
||
" three pickings are created with your *Purchase Order* as the source "
|
||
"document:"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:56
|
||
msgid "The first one with a reference *IN* to designate the receipt process;"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:59
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The second one with a reference *INT*, which is the move to the quality "
|
||
"control zone;"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:62
|
||
msgid "The last one with a reference *INT* to designate the move to stock."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:69
|
||
msgid "Process the receipt, quality control and entry in stock"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:71
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"As the receipt operation is the first one to be processed, it has a *Ready* "
|
||
"status while the others are *Waiting Another Operation*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:74
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To access the receipt operation, click on the button from the *Purchase "
|
||
"Order* or go back to the *Inventory* app dashboard and click on *Receipts*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:81
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the receipt order, products are always considered available because they "
|
||
"come from the supplier. Then, the receipt can be validated."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:88
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once the receipt has been validated, the transfer to quality becomes "
|
||
"*Ready*. And, because the documents are chained to each other, products "
|
||
"previously received are automatically reserved on the transfer. Then, the "
|
||
"transfer can be directly validated."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:100
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, the transfer that enters the products to stock is *Ready*. Here, it is "
|
||
"again ready to be validated in order to transfer the products to your stock "
|
||
"location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Process a Receipt in two steps (Input + Stock)"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Odoo uses routes to define exactly how you will handle the different receipt"
|
||
" steps. The configuration is done at the *Warehouse* level. By default, the "
|
||
"reception is a one-step process, but changing the configuration can allow "
|
||
"you to have 2 steps."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:13
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The 2 steps flow is like this: you receive the goods in an input area, then "
|
||
"transfer them to your stock. As long as the goods are not transferred in "
|
||
"your stock, they will not be available for further processing."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:21
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The first step is to allow using *multi-step routes*. Indeed, routes provide"
|
||
" a mechanism to chain different actions together. In this case, we will "
|
||
"chain the unload step in the input area to the step entering the products in"
|
||
" stock."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:26
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To allow *multi-step routes*, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> "
|
||
"Settings` and activate the feature. By default, activating *multi-step "
|
||
"routes* will also activate *Storage Locations*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:34
|
||
msgid "Configure warehouse for receipt in 2 steps"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:36
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once *multi-step routes* is activated, you can go to "
|
||
":menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouse` and enter the warehouse which "
|
||
"will use receipt in 2 steps. Then, you can select the option *Receive goods "
|
||
"in input and then stock (2 steps)* for *Incoming Shipments*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:44
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Activating this option will lead to the creation of a new *Input* location. "
|
||
"If you want to rename it, you can go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> "
|
||
"Locations --> Select Input` and update its name."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:52
|
||
msgid "Create a purchase order"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:54
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the *Purchase* application, you can create a *Request for Quotation* with"
|
||
" some storable products to receive from a supplier. Once the *RfQ* is "
|
||
"confirmed, the receipt picking will be created and automatically linked to "
|
||
"your purchase order."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:62
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, by clicking on the *1 Receipt* button, you will see the first picking "
|
||
"which will allow entering the product in the *input location*. Then, another"
|
||
" picking, an internal transfer, has been created in order to move the "
|
||
"products to *Stock*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:68
|
||
msgid "Process the receipt and the internal transfer"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:70
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The receipt is the first one to be processed and has a *Ready* status while "
|
||
"the internal transfer will only become *Ready* once the receipt has been "
|
||
"marked as *Done*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:74
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can enter the receipt operation from the purchase order, or access it "
|
||
"through the inventory dashboard."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:80
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"By default, a receipt is always considered as ready to be processed. Then, "
|
||
"you will be able to directly click on *Validate* to mark it as done."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:87
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once the receipt has been validated, the internal transfer is ready to be "
|
||
"processed. As documents are chained, the products which have been received "
|
||
"are automatically reserved on the internal transfer. Once the transfer is "
|
||
"validated, those products enter the stock and you will be able to use them "
|
||
"to fulfill customer deliveries or manufacture products."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Lots and Serial Numbers"
|
||
msgstr "Партии и Серийные номера"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:3
|
||
msgid "What's the difference between lots and serial numbers?"
|
||
msgstr "Какая разница между партиями и серийными номерами?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:6
|
||
msgid "Introduction"
|
||
msgstr "Введение"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In Odoo, lots and serial numbers have similarities in their functional "
|
||
"system but are different in their behavior. They are both managed within the"
|
||
" **Inventory**, **Purchases** and **Sales** app."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"В Odoo партии и серийные номера имеют сходство в своей функциональной "
|
||
"системе, но разные в своем поведении. Они оба руководствуются в приложениях "
|
||
"** Состав **, ** Покупки ** и ** Продажи **."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:12
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Lots** correspond to a certain number of products you received and store "
|
||
"altogether in one single pack."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"** Партии ** соответствуют определенному количеству товаров, которые вы "
|
||
"получили и хранятся в одном пакете."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:15
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Serial numbers** are identification numbers given to one product in "
|
||
"particular, to allow to track the history of the item from reception to "
|
||
"delivery and after-sales."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"** Серийные номера ** - идентификационные номера, предоставленные одному "
|
||
"товару, в частности, чтобы отслеживать историю товара от приема до доставки "
|
||
"и писляпродажу."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:20
|
||
msgid "When to use"
|
||
msgstr "когда использовать"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:22
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Lots** are interesting for products you receive in great quantity and for "
|
||
"which a lot number can help in reportings, quality controls, or any other "
|
||
"info. Lots will help identify a number of pieces having for instance a "
|
||
"production fault. It can be useful for a batch production of clothes or "
|
||
"food."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"** Партии ** для товаров, которые вы получаете в большом количестве, и для "
|
||
"которых партии могут помочь в отчетах, контроля качества или иной "
|
||
"информации. Партии помогут идентифицировать несколько произведений, "
|
||
"например, производственную ошибку. Это может быть полезным для серийного "
|
||
"производства одежды или пищи."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:28
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Serial numbers** are interesting for items that could require after-sales "
|
||
"service, such as smartphones, laptops, fridges, and any electronic devices. "
|
||
"You could use the manufacturer's serial number or your own, depending on the"
|
||
" way you manage these products"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"** Серийные номера ** интересны товаров, которые могут требовать "
|
||
"послепродажное обслуживание, например, смартфоны, ноутбуки, холодильники и "
|
||
"любые электронные устройства. Вы можете использовать серийный номер "
|
||
"производителя или свой собственный, в зависимости от того, как вы управляете"
|
||
" этими товарами."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:34
|
||
msgid "When not to use"
|
||
msgstr "Если не использовать"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:36
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Storing consumable products such as kitchen roll, toilet paper, pens and "
|
||
"paper blocks in lots would make no sense at all, as there are very few "
|
||
"chances that you can return them for production fault."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Хранение расходных материалов, таких как кухонный рулон, туалетная бумага, "
|
||
"ручки и бумажные блоки в партиях, вообще не будет иметь смысла, потому что "
|
||
"есть очень мало шансов, что вы можете вернуть их в производственную ошибку."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:40
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"On the other hand, giving a serial number to every product is a time-"
|
||
"consuming task that will have a purpose only in the case of items that have "
|
||
"a warranty and/or after-sales services. Putting a serial number on bread, "
|
||
"for instance, makes no sense at all."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"С другой стороны, присвоение серийного номера каждому товару отнимает много "
|
||
"времени, и будет целевое значение только в отношении товаров, имеющих "
|
||
"гарантийные и / или послепродажные услуги. Например, введение серийного "
|
||
"номера на хлеб вообще не имеет смысла."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:46
|
||
msgid ":doc:`serial_numbers`"
|
||
msgstr ":doc:`serial_numbers`"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:47
|
||
msgid ":doc:`lots`"
|
||
msgstr ":doc:`lots`"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Manage expiration dates"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In many companies, products have expiration dates and they should be tracked"
|
||
" based on those dates. In the food industry, for example, tracking stocks "
|
||
"based on expiration dates is mandatory to avoid selling expired products to "
|
||
"customers."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:10
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"With Odoo, you can track your products based on their expiration dates, even"
|
||
" if they are already tracked by lots or serial numbers."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:14
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:15
|
||
msgid "Configurations"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:17
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:18
|
||
msgid "Application configuration"
|
||
msgstr "Настройка программы"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:19
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To use expiration dates tracking, open the *Inventory* application and go to"
|
||
" :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings` and activate the *Lots & Serial"
|
||
" Numbers* and *Expiration Dates* features."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:27
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:28
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:68
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:90
|
||
msgid "Product configuration"
|
||
msgstr "Настройка товара"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:29
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, you have the possibility to define different dates in the *inventory "
|
||
"tab* of the product form:"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:32
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Product Use Time: it’s the number of days before the goods start "
|
||
"deteriorating, without being dangerous yet. It will be computed using the "
|
||
"lot/serial number;"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:34
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Product Life Time: refers to the number of days before the goods may become "
|
||
"dangerous and must not be consumed. It will be computed on the lot/serial "
|
||
"number;"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:36
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Product Removal Time: shows the number of days before the goods should be "
|
||
"removed from the stock. It will be computed on the lot/serial number;"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:38
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Product Alert Time: refers to the number of days before an alert should be "
|
||
"raised on the lot/serial number."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:44
|
||
msgid "Expiration Date on Lots/Serial Numbers"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:46
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When receiving a product in stock, the dates will automatically be updated "
|
||
"on the corresponding lot/serial number. This update will be based on the "
|
||
"reception date of the product and the times set on the product form."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:58
|
||
msgid "Expiration Alerts"
|
||
msgstr "Оповещения об окончании срока действия"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:60
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can access all your expiration alerts from the *inventory* app. To do "
|
||
"so, go to :menuselection:`Master Data --> Lots/Serial Numbers`. There, you "
|
||
"can use the pre-existing filter that shows all the lots/serial numbers that "
|
||
"exceeded their alert date."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Manage lots of identical products"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Lots are useful for products you receive in great quantity and for which a "
|
||
"lot number can help in reporting, quality controls, or any other info. Lots "
|
||
"will help identify a number of pieces having, for instance, a production "
|
||
"fault. It can be useful for a batch production of clothes or food."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:11
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Odoo has the capacity to manage lots, ensuring compliance with the "
|
||
"traceability requirements imposed by the majority of industries."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:14
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The double-entry management in Odoo enables you to run very advanced "
|
||
"traceability."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Управление двойным вводом в Odoo дает вам возможность запустить очень "
|
||
"продвинутое отслеживания."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:18
|
||
msgid "Setting Up"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:21
|
||
msgid "Application Configuration"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:23
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"First, you need to activate the tracking of lot numbers. To do so, go to "
|
||
":menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings` and tick *Lots & "
|
||
"Serial Numbers*. Then, click on save."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:31
|
||
msgid "Product Configuration"
|
||
msgstr "Настройка товара"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:33
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, you have to configure which products you want to track by serial "
|
||
"numbers."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:36
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Go to :menuselection:`Master Data --> Products` and open the product of your"
|
||
" choice. There, click on *Edit* and select *Tracking by Lots* in the "
|
||
"inventory tab."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:47
|
||
msgid "Manage Lots"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:52
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In order to receive a product tracked by lots, you have to specify its lot "
|
||
"numbers. You have several ways of doing so:"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:55
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:65
|
||
msgid "Manually assign the different lot numbers"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:57
|
||
msgid "Copy/paste lot numbers from an Excel file"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:59
|
||
msgid "First, you need to open the detailed operations of your picking."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:67
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When opening the detailed operations, you can click on *Add a line*. Then, "
|
||
"you will be able to fill the lot number in. Once done, you can click on *Add"
|
||
" a line* again to register a new lot number."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:75
|
||
msgid "Copy/paste lot number from an Excel file"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:77
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once the spreadsheet containing the lot numbers you received from your "
|
||
"supplier and copy the list. Then, you can paste them in the *Lot/Serial "
|
||
"Number Name* column for Odoo to automatically create the necessary lines. "
|
||
"After that, you will have to manually enter the number of products that are "
|
||
"contained in each one of the lots."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:93
|
||
msgid "Operation Types"
|
||
msgstr "Типы операций"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:95
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Of course, you also have the possibility to define how you will manage lots "
|
||
"for each operation type. To do so, open the *Inventory* app and go to "
|
||
":menuselection:`Configuration --> Operation Types`."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:99
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"For each type (receipts, internal transfers, deliveries, …), you can decide "
|
||
"if you allow to create new lot numbers or only use existing ones. By "
|
||
"default, the creation of new lots is only allowed at product reception, and "
|
||
"using existing lot numbers isn’t allowed in this operation. If you have "
|
||
"inter-warehouse transfers and track products by lots, it can be useful to "
|
||
"allow using existing lot numbers in receipts too."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:111
|
||
msgid "Lots traceability"
|
||
msgstr "отслеживание партий"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:113
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The lot number given to the products allows you to keep track of where they "
|
||
"were received, put in stock, to whom they were sold and where they were "
|
||
"shipped to."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:117
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To track an item, open the *Inventory* module and, in :menuselection:`Master"
|
||
" Data --> Lots/Serial Numbers`, click on the lot number corresponding to "
|
||
"your search."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:124
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When you open the *Traceability* information, you see in which documents the"
|
||
" lot number has been used."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:130
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, if you want to locate the lot number, you can do so by clicking on the "
|
||
"*Location* stat button."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Work with serial numbers"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To track products with serial numbers, you can use the serial number "
|
||
"tracking. With them, you can track the current location of the product and, "
|
||
"when the products are moved from one location to another, the system will "
|
||
"automatically identify the current location of the product, based on its "
|
||
"last movement."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:11
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you want to do it or run very advanced traceability, the Odoo double-"
|
||
"entry management is the feature you need."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:20
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"First, you need to activate the serial numbers tracking. To do so, go to "
|
||
":menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings` in the *Inventory* application. "
|
||
"Then, enable the feature and hit save."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:30
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, you have to configure the products you want to track by serial numbers."
|
||
" To do so, go to :menuselection:`Master Data --> Products` and open the "
|
||
"product of your choice. Edit it and select *Tracking By Unique Serial "
|
||
"Number* in the *Inventory tab*. Then, click on save."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:42
|
||
msgid "Manage Serial Numbers"
|
||
msgstr "Управление серийными номерами"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:47
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To receive a product that is tracked by serial number, you have to specify "
|
||
"its serial number. Of course, you have several ways of doing so:"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:50
|
||
msgid "Manual assignation"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:52
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:73
|
||
msgid "Multi-assignation"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:54
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:89
|
||
msgid "Copy/pasting from an Excel file"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:56
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Whatever could be your favorite way to assign serial numbers, you firstly "
|
||
"need to open the detailed operations of your picking."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:63
|
||
msgid "Manual assignation of the different serial numbers"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:65
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When opening the detailed operations, you can click on *Add a line*. Then, "
|
||
"you will be able to fill in the serial number field. Once done, you can "
|
||
"click again on *Add a line* to register a new serial number."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:75
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"By using the multi-assignation of serial numbers, Odoo will automatically "
|
||
"create the necessary lines. To do so, you have to enter the first serial "
|
||
"number of your set and the number of products you have to assign a serial "
|
||
"number to."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:80
|
||
msgid "Once done, click on *Assign Serial Numbers* and Odoo will do the rest."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:91
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To use copy/pasting, open the spreadsheet containing the serial numbers you "
|
||
"received and copy the list. Then, past them in the *Lot/Serial Number Name* "
|
||
"column of the wizard. Doing so, Odoo will automatically create the lines you"
|
||
" need."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:106
|
||
msgid "Operation types"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:108
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You also have the possibility to define how you will manage lots for each "
|
||
"operation type. To define it, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> "
|
||
"Operation Types` in the *Inventory* app."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:112
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"For each type, you can decide if you allow the creation of new lot numbers "
|
||
"or want to use existing ones. By default, the creation of new lots is only "
|
||
"allowed at product reception."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:120
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you have inter-warehouse transfers and track products by lots, it can be "
|
||
"useful to allow using existing lot numbers in receipts too."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:124
|
||
msgid "Serial Number traceability"
|
||
msgstr "Отслеживание серийного номера"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:126
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Using serial numbers allows you to keep track of where the products were "
|
||
"received, put in stock, to whom they were sold, and where they were shipped "
|
||
"to."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:130
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Tracking an item is easy: open the *Inventory* app, and go to "
|
||
":menuselection:`Master Data --> Lots/Serial Numbers` and click on the serial"
|
||
" number corresponding to your search. Then, open the *Traceability* "
|
||
"information. There, you will see in which documents the serial number has "
|
||
"been used."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:140
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"And, if you want to locate a serial number, you can do so by clicking on the"
|
||
" *Location* button available on the serial number form."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Miscellaneous Operations"
|
||
msgstr "Разные Операции"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Process Batch Transfers"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Batch picking allows a single picker to handle a batch of orders, reducing "
|
||
"the number of times he must visit the same location. In Odoo, it means you "
|
||
"can regroup several transfers into the same batch transfer, then process it,"
|
||
" either via the barcode application or in the form view."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:11
|
||
msgid "Create a Batch Transfer"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:13
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To activate the batch picking option, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> "
|
||
"Configuration --> Configuration` and enable *Batch Pickings*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:20
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Then, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Operations --> Batch Transfers` "
|
||
"and hit the create button."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:27
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, determine the batch transfer responsible and the type of transfers you "
|
||
"want to include in the batch. To add the types of transfers, click on *Add a"
|
||
" line*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:34
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the example below, a filter was applied to only see the transfers that "
|
||
"are in the *Pick* step. After that, the different transfers that needed to "
|
||
"be included in the batch transfer were selected."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:42
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To see the products to pick for the different transfers, click on *Select*. "
|
||
"If *Multi-locations* has been activated, the document also shows the "
|
||
"locations they have been reserved from."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:51
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"For more info about *Multi-Locations*, please refer to this doc: "
|
||
":doc:`../warehouses/location_creation`."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:54
|
||
msgid "Create a Batch Transfer from the Transfers List View"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:56
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"From the *Transfers List View*, select transfers that should be included in "
|
||
"the Batch. Then, select *Add to batch* from the *Action* list."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:64
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Next, determine if you want to add the transfers to an existing draft batch "
|
||
"transfer or create a new one."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:72
|
||
msgid "Process a Batch Transfer"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:74
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"While gathering the products, you can edit the batch transfer and update the"
|
||
" *Quantity done* for each product. Once everything has been picked, select "
|
||
"*Validate* so the different transfers contained in the batch are validated "
|
||
"too."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:83
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In case all the products cannot be picked, you can create backorders for "
|
||
"each individual transfer which couldn’t be completely processed."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:96
|
||
msgid "Process a Batch Transfer from the Barcode app"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:98
|
||
msgid "Enter the *Barcode* application, select the *Batch Transfers* menu."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:104
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Then, you can enter the batch transfer on which you want to work. Batch "
|
||
"transfers can easily be grouped per responsible if necessary."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:111
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the batch transfer, products are classified per location. The source "
|
||
"document is visible on each line and a color-code helps differentiate them."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:119
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To see the products to pick from another location, click on the *Next* "
|
||
"button."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:126
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once all the products have been picked, click on *Validate* (on the last "
|
||
"page) to mark the batch transfer as done."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Send Automated Emails at Delivery"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"First, go to the *Inventory* app, then to *Settings* and activate the *Email"
|
||
" Confirmation* feature. If you work in multi-company, this configuration is "
|
||
"company-specific."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:15
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When you enable this feature, Odoo automatically creates an email template. "
|
||
"Of course, you can modify it if necessary by clicking on the small arrow "
|
||
"next to its name."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:23
|
||
msgid "Send email at delivery validation"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:25
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"On the inventory dashboard, click on *Create* and fill the form for a "
|
||
"specific partner. Once you have added some products in it, *Validate* it and"
|
||
" do the same for the delivery."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:32
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Doing so, an automated email will be sent and will appear in the chatter."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:38
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you work with a shipping method, and then have a tracking link, it will "
|
||
"be included in the standard email template."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Manage Stock that you don't own"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Sometimes, suppliers can offer you to store and sell products without having"
|
||
" to buy those items. This technique is called *consignee stock*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Consignee stock is a great way for manufacturers and suppliers to launch new"
|
||
" products. As resellers may be reluctant to buy a product they are not sure "
|
||
"to be able to sell, consignee stock will allow them to offer an item to "
|
||
"check its market without having to pay for it in the first place."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:14
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Of course, Odoo has the ability to manage those consignee stocks through "
|
||
"advanced settings."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:20
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To use this feature, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> "
|
||
"Settings` in the inventory app. Then, enable the *Consignment* feature in "
|
||
"the *Traceability* section. Now, hit save."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:28
|
||
msgid "Reception of Consignee Stock"
|
||
msgstr "Нахождения комесийного состава"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:30
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When in the *Inventory* app, open the receipts and create a new reception. "
|
||
"On the right side, you will see that a new line called *Assign Owner* has "
|
||
"appeared. There, you can specify the partner which owns the stock."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:39
|
||
msgid "If you are the owner, you can leave the field blank."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:41
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once the receipt is validated, the products enter your stock but still "
|
||
"belong to the owner. They don’t impact your inventory valuation."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Scrap Products"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In your warehouse, you sometimes find products that are damaged or that are "
|
||
"unusable due to expiry or for some other reasons. You often notice this "
|
||
"during picking or physical inventory. Since those products cannot be sold or"
|
||
" stored, you have to scrap them."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:10
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When goods are scrapped, they are not reflected in the system as a part of "
|
||
"the inventory. The scrapped material will be physically moved to the scrap "
|
||
"area and not taken into account into inventory valuation."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:15
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Scrap means waste that either has no economic value or only the value of its"
|
||
" basic material content, recoverable through recycling."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:21
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When you install the *Inventory* app, Odoo automatically creates a scrap "
|
||
"location. It’s named *Virtual Location/Scap*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:24
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Of course, you can create new scrap areas if needed. To do so, go to "
|
||
":menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings` and activate the "
|
||
"*Storage Locations* feature."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:31
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Locations` and create your "
|
||
"scrap location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:34
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You have to check *Is a Scrap Location?* on the location form. In fact, "
|
||
"scrap locations cannot be used as normal storage locations and then, a "
|
||
"virtual location will be created for scrapped products."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:39
|
||
msgid "Different ways to scrap products"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:41
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"With Odoo, you have several ways to scrap products: from receipts, from a "
|
||
"delivery order, and from an internal transfer."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:45
|
||
msgid "Scrap from receipt"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:47
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Scrapping products from receipts is easy. Go to :menuselection:`Inventory "
|
||
"--> Dashboard --> Receipts` or click on *1 TO PROCESS* under the receipts "
|
||
"location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:53
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, open the receipt and validate the picking. Once the products entered "
|
||
"your stock, the Scrap button appears on the top left corner of your screen."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:57
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can scrap products that were part of the receipt from there. If you do "
|
||
"so, it will move them from available stock to the virtual scrap location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:68
|
||
msgid "Scrap from delivery order"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:70
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To scrap products from a delivery order, go to :menuselection:`Inventory -->"
|
||
" Dashboard --> Delivery orders` or click on *1 TO PROCESS*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:76
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once done, open the delivery order. You can see the scrap button in the "
|
||
"upper left of the document. If you scrap the product from there, it will be "
|
||
"moved from your available stock to the virtual scrap location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:80
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can find all the scrap orders made from the picking by clicking on the "
|
||
"button on the top right corner of the document."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:93
|
||
msgid "Scrap from an internal transfer"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:95
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To do this, the flow is almost the same. In fact, you just have to go to "
|
||
":menuselection:`Inventory --> Dashboard --> Internal Transfers`."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:101
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"There, open the internal transfer that interests you. Now, click on the "
|
||
"scrap button that is on the top left of the document."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:104
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When scrapping before validating the internal transfer, the product is, by "
|
||
"default, moved from the source location to the virtual scrap location. But, "
|
||
"if you scrap after validating the internal transfer, it will be moved from "
|
||
"the destination location, as opposed to the source location, to the virtual "
|
||
"scrap location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:110
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Of course, you can manually update the source location of the scrap order if"
|
||
" necessary."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Send Automated SMS at Delivery"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To send automated SMS, you need to activate the *SMS Confirmation* feature. "
|
||
"To do so, go to the *Inventory* app *Settings* and enable the feature. In "
|
||
"multi-company, this feature is company-specific."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:15
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Of course, an SMS template already exists by default in Odoo. You can modify"
|
||
" it by clicking on the arrow on the right."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:22
|
||
msgid "Send SMS at delivery validation"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:24
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To use this feature, try to *Create* a delivery order for a specific partner"
|
||
" and add some products to it. Then, *Validate* the delivery."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:30
|
||
msgid "Now, the automated SMS that has been sent appears in the chatter."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:36
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The partner which is set on the transfer needs to have a phone number "
|
||
"specified in its contact form for the SMS to be sent."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:39
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you work with a shipping method, and then have a tracking link, it will "
|
||
"be included in the SMS template."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Planning"
|
||
msgstr "Планирование"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:3
|
||
msgid "How is the Scheduled Delivery Date Computed"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Providing the best possible service to customers is vital for business. It "
|
||
"implies planning every move: manufacturing orders, deliveries, receptions, "
|
||
"and so on. To do so, you need to configure lead time properly and coordinate"
|
||
" scheduled dates."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:9
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"By using lead times, Odoo provides end dates, the **Commitment Date**, for "
|
||
"each process. On a sales order, for example, this is the date your customer "
|
||
"will get the products he ordered."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:13
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"From the customers’ side, the commitment date is important because it gives "
|
||
"them an estimation of when they will receive their products. The dates take "
|
||
"all other lead times, such as manufacturing, delivery, or suppliers, into "
|
||
"account."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:19
|
||
msgid "How are Lead Times Calculated?"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:27
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"As said above, there are several types of lead times. Each is calculated "
|
||
"based on various indicators. Before going through the configuration, here is"
|
||
" a brief summary of how lead times are calculated and what they are:"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:32
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Customer Lead Time**: the customer lead time is the default duration you "
|
||
"set. Therefore, the expected date on the sales orders is today + customer "
|
||
"lead time."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:36
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Sales Security Lead Time**: the purpose is to be ready shipping that many "
|
||
"days before the actual commitment taken with the customer. Then, the default"
|
||
" scheduled date on the delivery order is **SO delivery date - Security Lead "
|
||
"Time**."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:41
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Purchase Security Lead Time**: additional time to mitigate the risk of a "
|
||
"vendor delay. The receipt will be scheduled that many days earlier to cope "
|
||
"with unexpected vendor delays. In case of a *Replenish to Order*, the "
|
||
"**Delivery order scheduled date - Security lead time** for purchase will be "
|
||
"the default *Receipt* scheduled date."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:48
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Purchase Delivery Lead Time**: this is the expected time between a PO "
|
||
"being confirmed and the receipt of the ordered products. The **Receipt "
|
||
"scheduled date - Vendor delivery date** is the default *PO Order By* date."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:53
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Days to Purchase**: number of days the purchasing department takes to "
|
||
"validate a PO. If another RFQ to the same vendor is already opened, Odoo "
|
||
"adds the line to the RFQ instead of creating a new one. Then, the specific "
|
||
"date is set on the line."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:58
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Manufacturing Lead Time**: this is the expected time it takes to "
|
||
"manufacture a product. This lead time is independent of the quantity to "
|
||
"produce and does not take the routing time into account."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:63
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Manufacturing Security Lead Time**: additional time to mitigate the risk "
|
||
"of a manufacturing delay. In case of a *Replenish to Order*, the **Delivery "
|
||
"Order scheduled date - Manufacturing Lead Time - Manufacturing Security Lead"
|
||
" Time** is the default *Manufacturing Order* planned date."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:70
|
||
msgid "Sales - Lead Times"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:72
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the *Sales* app, there is an option called *Delivery Date*. It allows "
|
||
"seeing an additional field on the sales orders, *Expected Date*. This one is"
|
||
" automatically computed based on the different lead times previously "
|
||
"configured."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:81
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If the set up *Delivery Date* is earlier than the the *Expected Date*, a "
|
||
"warning message is displayed."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:89
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"But, for all of this properly working, it is still necessary to configure "
|
||
"all the lead times that could occur."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:93
|
||
msgid "Customer Lead Time"
|
||
msgstr "Срок поставки заказчика"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:95
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The *Customer Lead Time* is the time needed for your product to go from your"
|
||
" warehouse to the customer place. It can be configured on any product by "
|
||
"going to :menuselection:`Sales --> Products --> Products`. There, open your "
|
||
"product form, go in the inventory tab, and add your *Customer Lead Time*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:105
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"For example, product B is ordered on the 2nd of April but the *Customer Lead"
|
||
" Time* is two days. In that case, the expected delivery date is the 4th of "
|
||
"April."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:110
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:182
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:219
|
||
msgid "Security Lead Time"
|
||
msgstr "Надежный временной цикл"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:112
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In sales, *Security Lead Time* corresponds to backup days to ensure you are "
|
||
"able to deliver the products in time. The purpose is to be ready shipping "
|
||
"earlier in order to arrive on time."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:116
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The number of security days is subtracted from the calculation to compute a "
|
||
"scheduled date earlier than the one promised to the customer."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:119
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To set this up, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> "
|
||
"Settings` and enable the feature *Security Lead Time for Sales*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:126
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"For example, product B is scheduled to be delivered on the 6th of April but "
|
||
"the *Security Lead Time* is one day. In that case, the scheduled date for "
|
||
"the delivery order is the 5th of April."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:131
|
||
msgid "Deliver several products"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:133
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In many cases, customers order several products at the same time. Those can "
|
||
"have different lead times but still need to be delivered, at once or "
|
||
"separately. Fortunately, Odoo can help you handle these cases easily."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:137
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"From the *Other Info* tab of your *Sale Order*, you can choose between *When"
|
||
" all products are ready* and *As soon as possible*. The first one is to "
|
||
"deliver products at once, while the second is to deliver them separately."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:142
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"For example, products A and B are ordered at the same time. A has 8 lead "
|
||
"days and B has 5. With the first option, the *Expected Date* is calculated "
|
||
"based on the product with the most lead days, here A. If the order is "
|
||
"confirmed on the 2nd of April, then the *Expected Date* is on the 10th of "
|
||
"April."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:148
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"With the second option, the *Expected Date* is calculated based on the "
|
||
"product with the least customer lead days. In this example, B is the product"
|
||
" with the least lead days. So, the *Expected Date* is on the 7th of April."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:154
|
||
msgid "Purchase - Lead Times"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:157
|
||
msgid "Supplier Lead Time"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:159
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The *Supplier Lead Time* is the time needed for a product you purchased to "
|
||
"be delivered. To configure it, open a product from :menuselection:`Purchase "
|
||
"--> Products --> Products` and add a vendor under the *Purchase* tab."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:168
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"By clicking on *Add a line*, a new window is displayed. You can specify the "
|
||
"*Delivery Lead Time* there. If done so, the delivery day for every purchase "
|
||
"of that product is now equal to *Date of the Purchase Order + Delivery Lead "
|
||
"Time*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:178
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"It is possible to add different vendors and, thus, different lead times "
|
||
"depending on the vendor."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:184
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The *Security Lead Time* for purchase follows the same logic as the one for "
|
||
"*Sales*, except that you are the customer. Then, it is the margin of error "
|
||
"for your supplier to deliver your order."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:188
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To set up *Security Lead Time* for purchase, go to :menuselection:`Inventory"
|
||
" --> Configuration --> Settings` and enable the feature."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:196
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Doing so, every time the system generates purchase orders, those are "
|
||
"scheduled that many days earlier to cope with unexpected vendor delays."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:200
|
||
msgid "Manufacturing - Lead Times"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:203
|
||
msgid "Manufacturing Lead Time"
|
||
msgstr "Время производства"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:205
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The *Manufacturing Lead Time* is the time needed to manufacture the product."
|
||
" To specify it, open the *Inventory* tab of your product form and add the "
|
||
"number of days the manufacturing takes."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:213
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When working with *Manufacturing Lead Times*, the *Deadline Start* of the "
|
||
"*MO* is **Commitment Date - Manufacturing Lead Time**. For example, the MO’s"
|
||
" deadline start date for an order having a commitment date on the 10th of "
|
||
"July is June 27th."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:221
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The *Security Lead Time* for manufacturing allows generating manufacturing "
|
||
"orders earlier to cope with the risk of manufacturing delays."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:225
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To enable it, go to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Configuration --> "
|
||
"Settings` and tick *Security Lead Time*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:232
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"For example, a customer orders B with a delivery date scheduled on the 20th "
|
||
"of June. The *Manufacturing Lead Time* is 14 days and the *Security Lead "
|
||
"Time* is 3 days, so the manufacturing of B needs to start at the latest on "
|
||
"the 3rd of June, which is the MO’s planned date."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:238
|
||
msgid "Global Example"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:240
|
||
msgid "Here is a configuration:"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:242
|
||
msgid "1 day of security lead time for Sales"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:243
|
||
msgid "2 days of security lead time for Manufacturing"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:244
|
||
msgid "3 days of manufacturing lead time"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:245
|
||
msgid "1 day of security lead time for Purchase"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:246
|
||
msgid "4 days of supplier lead time"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:248
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Let’s say that a customer orders B on the 1st of September and the delivery "
|
||
"date is planned to be within 20 days (September 20th). In such a scenario, "
|
||
"here is when all the various steps are triggered."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:252
|
||
msgid "**September 1st**: the sales order is created"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:253
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**September 10th**: the deadline to order components from the supplier "
|
||
"because of the manufacturing process (4 days of supplier lead time)"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:256
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**September 13th**: the reception of the product from the supplier (1 day of"
|
||
" security lead time for Purchase)"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:258
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**September 14th**: the deadline start date for the manufacturing (19th - 3 "
|
||
"days of manufacturing lead time - 2 days of security lead time for "
|
||
"Manufacturing)"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:261
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**September 19th**: the expected date on the delivery order form (1 day of "
|
||
"security lead time for sales)"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Configure and Run Schedulers"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:6
|
||
msgid "What is a scheduler?"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The scheduler is the calculation engine that plans and prioritizes "
|
||
"production and purchasing. It does it automatically, according to the rules "
|
||
"defined on products. By default, the scheduler is set to run once a day."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:14
|
||
msgid "Calculating Requirements / Scheduling"
|
||
msgstr "Расчет требований / планирования"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:16
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Scheduling only validates procurements that are confirmed but not yet "
|
||
"started. These procurement reservations will start production, tasks or "
|
||
"purchases themselves, depending on the configuration of the requested "
|
||
"product."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:21
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"As a human would do, the scheduler takes the priority of operations into "
|
||
"account when starting reservations and procurements. Urgent requests will be"
|
||
" started first."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:26
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In case there are not enough products in stock to satisfy all the requests, "
|
||
"you can be sure that the most urgent ones will be produced first."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:31
|
||
msgid "Configure and run the scheduler"
|
||
msgstr "Настройте и запустите планировщик"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:34
|
||
msgid "Run the scheduler manually"
|
||
msgstr "Запустите планировщик вручную"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:36
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To start the scheduler manually, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> "
|
||
"Operations --> Run Schedulers`. The scheduler uses all the relevant "
|
||
"parameters defined for products, suppliers and the company to prioritize the"
|
||
" different production orders, deliveries and supplier purchases."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:45
|
||
msgid "Configure and run the scheduler (for advanced users)"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:47
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To use this feature, you have to enable the :doc:`Developer mode "
|
||
"<../../../general/developer_mode/activate>` mode."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:50
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Then, go to :menuselection:`Settings --> Technical --> Automation --> "
|
||
"Scheduled Actions` and modify the *Run MRP Scheduler Configuration*. There, "
|
||
"you can set the starting time of the scheduler."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Products"
|
||
msgstr "Продукты"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:3
|
||
msgid "How to select the right replenishment strategy"
|
||
msgstr "Как установить правильную стратегию пополнения на складе"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Minimum Stock rules and Make to Order have similar consequences but "
|
||
"different rules. They should be used depending on your manufacturing and "
|
||
"delivery strategies."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Правила минимального запаса и Сделать на заказ имеют подобные последствия, "
|
||
"но разные правила. Они должны использоваться в зависимости от ваших "
|
||
"технологий производства и стратегии доставки."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:10
|
||
msgid "Terminology"
|
||
msgstr "Терминология"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:13
|
||
msgid "Minimum stock rule"
|
||
msgstr "Правило минимального запаса"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:15
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Minimum Stock rules are used to ensure that you always have the minimum "
|
||
"amount of a product in stock in order to manufacture your products and/or "
|
||
"answer to your customer needs. When the stock level of a product reaches its"
|
||
" minimum the system will automatically generate a procurement order with the"
|
||
" quantity needed to reach the maximum stock level."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Правила минимального запаса используются для обеспечения того, что у вас "
|
||
"всегда есть минимальное количество товара на складе для изготовления вашей "
|
||
"продукции и / или ответы на потребности вашего клиента. Когда уровень запаса"
|
||
" товара достигает минимального уровня, система автоматически генерирует "
|
||
"заказ на закупку с количеством, необходимым для достижения максимального "
|
||
"уровня запаса."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:22
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:58
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:67
|
||
msgid "Make to Order"
|
||
msgstr "Сделать на заказ"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:24
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The Make to Order function will trigger a Purchase Order of the amount of "
|
||
"the Sales Order related to the product. The system will **not** check the "
|
||
"current stock. This means that a draft purchase order will be generated "
|
||
"regardless of the quantity on hand of the product."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Функция Сделать по заказу запускает заказ на покупку суммы заказа клиента, "
|
||
"связанного с товаром. Система не будет проверять текущий запас. Это "
|
||
"означает, что проект заказ на покупку будет сгенерирован независимо от "
|
||
"количества, находящихся в наличии товара."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:33
|
||
msgid "Minimum stock rules"
|
||
msgstr "Правила минимального запаса"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:35
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The Minimum Stock Rules configuration is available through your Inventory "
|
||
"module. In the Inventory Control menu select \"Reordering Rule\" in the drop"
|
||
" down menu. There, click on \"Create\" to set minimum and maximum stock "
|
||
"values for a given product."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Настройка правил минимальных запасов доступно через ваш модуль Состав. В "
|
||
"меню Управление складом выберите "Правило дозаказа" в выпадающем "
|
||
"меню. Нажмите "Создать", чтобы установить минимальные и "
|
||
"максимальные значения запасов для данного товара."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:44
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Show tooltips for \"minimum quantity\", \"maximum quantity\" and \"quantity "
|
||
"multiple\" fields"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Покажите подсказки для полей "минимальное количество", "
|
||
""максимальное количество" и "несколько количеств"."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:47
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Then, click on your product to access the related product form and, on the "
|
||
"\"Inventory submenu\", do not forget to select a supplier."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Нажмите товар, чтобы получить доступ к соответствующей формы товара, а в "
|
||
""Подменю состава" не забудьте выбрать поставщика."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:54
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Don't forget to select the right product type. A consumable can not be "
|
||
"stocked and will thus not be accounted for in the stock valuation."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Не забудьте выбрать правильный тип товара. Расходный материал не может быть "
|
||
"упакован, и поэтому не будет учтено в оценке запасов."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:60
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The Make to Order configuration is available on your product form through "
|
||
"your :menuselection:`Inventory --> Inventory control --> Products` (or any "
|
||
"other module where products are available)."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Настройка Сделать на заказ доступно в вашей форме товара через ваш "
|
||
":menuselection:`Inventory --> Inventory control --> Products` (или любой "
|
||
"другой модуль, где доступны товары)."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:64
|
||
msgid "On the product form, under Inventory, click on \"Make To Order\"."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"На форме товара в разделе "Склад" нажмите "Сделать "
|
||
"заказ"."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:70
|
||
msgid "Choice between the two options"
|
||
msgstr "Выбор между двумя функциями"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:72
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The choice between the two options is thus dependent of your inventory "
|
||
"strategy. If you prefer to have a buffer and always have at least a minimum "
|
||
"amount, the minimum stock rule should be used. If you want to reorder your "
|
||
"stocks only if your sale is confirmed it is better to use the Make to Order."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Выбор между двумя функциями зависит от вашей стратегии состава. Если вы "
|
||
"предпочитаете иметь буфер и всегда иметь по крайней мере минимальную сумму, "
|
||
"следует использовать правила минимальных запасов. Если вы хотите изменить "
|
||
"порядок свои запасы только при условии подтверждения продажи, лучше "
|
||
"воспользоваться кнопкой "Сделать по заказу"."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Use Different Units of Measure"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In some cases, handling products in different units of measure is necessary."
|
||
" For example, if you buy products in a country where the metric system is of"
|
||
" application and sell in a country where the imperial system is used, you "
|
||
"will need to convert the units. Another common use case is buying products "
|
||
"in bigger packs to your supplier and selling them in units to your "
|
||
"customers."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:12
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can set up Odoo to work with different units of measure for one product."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Вы можете настроить Odoo для работы с различными единицами измерения для "
|
||
"одного товара."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:18
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the *Inventory* application, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> "
|
||
"Settings`. In the *Products* section, activate *Units of Measure*, then "
|
||
"*Save*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:25
|
||
msgid "Create New Units of Measure"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:27
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the *Inventory* application go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> UoM`."
|
||
" There, hit *Create*. As an example, we will create a Box of 6 units that we"
|
||
" will use for the Egg product."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:34
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The category is important for unit conversion, you will be able to convert "
|
||
"products from one unit to another only if those units belong to the same "
|
||
"category. The box of 6 is 6 times bigger than the reference unit of measure "
|
||
"for the category which is “Units” here."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:43
|
||
msgid "Specify Units of Measure on your Products"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:45
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the :menuselection:`Inventory application --> Master Data --> Products`, "
|
||
"open the product which you would like to change the purchase/sale unit of "
|
||
"measure, and click on *Edit*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:49
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the *General Information* tab, you can select the *Unit of Measure* in "
|
||
"which the product will be sold, which is also the unit in which internal "
|
||
"transfers will take place. You can also select the *Purchase Unit of "
|
||
"Measure*, which is the unit in which you purchase the product."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:59
|
||
msgid "Transfer from One Unit to Another"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:62
|
||
msgid "Buy in the Pruchase UoM"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:64
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the *Purchase* application, *Create* a new request for quotation in which"
|
||
" you include the product with the different *Units of Measure* and *Confirm*"
|
||
" it."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:71
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"On the automatically generated purchase orders, the UoM used is the Box of "
|
||
"6, meaning the Purchase UoM. You have of course the possibility to manually "
|
||
"modify the UoM if necessary. When you enter the *Receipt* which is linked to"
|
||
" the purchase order, you can observe that the 10 boxes of 6 units have been "
|
||
"converted in 60 units. Indeed, the stock is managed in units."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:82
|
||
msgid "Replenishment"
|
||
msgstr "пополнение"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:84
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When doing a replenishment via the *Replenish* button on the product form, "
|
||
"you have the possibility to use a different unit of measure."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:94
|
||
msgid "Sell in bigger UoM"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:96
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can choose the unit of measure on the sale order document and decide to "
|
||
"sell the eggs by the dozen. When doing so, the price is automatically "
|
||
"computed from Units UoM to adapt to the selected *UoM*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:103
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the delivery order, the *UoM* used in the sale order is converted to the "
|
||
"*UoM* used for stock management, in our use case, the Units."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:3
|
||
msgid "When Should you Use Packages, Units of Measure or Special Packaging?"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:6
|
||
msgid "Units of Measure"
|
||
msgstr "Единицы измерения"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Units of measure specify the unit used to handle a product. In Odoo, you "
|
||
"have the possibility to specify the unit of measure in which you manage your"
|
||
" stock and the one which is used when purchasing the product to your "
|
||
"supplier."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:16
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The *conversion* between the different units of measure is done "
|
||
"automatically. The only condition is that all the units have to be in the "
|
||
"*same category* (Unit, Weight, Volume, Length,...)"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:20
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"For example, if I have the following reordering rule for the egg and I run "
|
||
"the scheduler, the quantity added in the automatically generated purchase "
|
||
"order will be in dozens but what will enter the stock will be units."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:35
|
||
msgid "Packages"
|
||
msgstr "Упаковка"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:37
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The package is the physical container in which you put one or several "
|
||
"products from a picking. For example, when you deliver a product, you can "
|
||
"decide to separate the quantity into two different packages. It then allows "
|
||
"you to have a report with the quantity of products for each package."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:43
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To separate a delivery into different packages you will have to set the done"
|
||
" quantity to the desired package quantity then click on \"PUT IN PACK\", do "
|
||
"this for each package."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:54
|
||
msgid "Packaging"
|
||
msgstr "Упаковка"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:56
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The packaging is the physical container that protects your product. If you "
|
||
"are selling computers, the packaging contains the computer with the notice "
|
||
"and the power plug."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:60
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In Odoo, packagings are used for indicative purposes on sale orders. They "
|
||
"can be specified on the product form, in the inventory tab."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:70
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Another useful use of the packaging is for product reception. By scanning "
|
||
"the barcode of the packaging, Odoo adds the number of units contained in the"
|
||
" packing on the picking."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Inventory Adjustment"
|
||
msgstr "Коррекция остатков"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Choose Between Reordering Rules and Make to Order"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"*Reordering rules* and *make to order* do both allow to automatically "
|
||
"replenish products when necessary. The difference between those tools is how"
|
||
" they are triggered."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:9
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"*Reordering rules* are used to ensure that you always have a minimum amount "
|
||
"of a product in stock in order to manufacture your products and/or answer to"
|
||
" your customer needs. When the stock level of a product reaches its minimum "
|
||
"the system will automatically generate a procurement with the needed "
|
||
"quantity to reach the maximum stock level."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:15
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The *Make to Order* route will trigger a procurement (purchase order or "
|
||
"manufacturing order) with the necessary quantity to fulfill a product "
|
||
"request (coming from a sale order or a manufacturing order). The system will"
|
||
" not check the quantity on hand for the corresponding product."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:24
|
||
msgid "Reordering Rules"
|
||
msgstr "Правила повторных заказов"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:26
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The *Reordering Rules* configuration is available through the menu "
|
||
":menuselection:`Inventory --> Master Data --> Reordering Rules`. There, "
|
||
"click on *Create* to set minimum and maximum stock values for a given "
|
||
"product."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:33
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When the forecasted stock goes below the *Minimum Quantity* specified in "
|
||
"this field, Odoo generates a procurement to bring the forecasted quantity to"
|
||
" the *Maximum Quantity*. The *Quantity Multiple* is used to round the "
|
||
"procurement quantity up to this multiple. If it is 0, the exact quantity "
|
||
"will be used."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:42
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The *Lead time* is the number of days after the order point is triggered to "
|
||
"receive the products or to order them to the vendor."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:45
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In case you work with multi-warehouses and/or multi-locations, you will be "
|
||
"able to specify different reordering rules for the same product in each "
|
||
"location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:50
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"For the reordering rules to be triggered, on the corresponding product, a "
|
||
"route should be specified. In case you manufacture your products, make sure "
|
||
"to select the route *Manufacture* and create a *Bill of Material* for the "
|
||
"product. In case you purchase your products, make sure to select the route "
|
||
"*Buy* and add a *Vendor Pricelist*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:62
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Don't forget to select the product type *storable* in the product form. A "
|
||
"consumable can not be stocked and won’t trigger reordering rules."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:69
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The *Make To Order* configuration is available on your product form through "
|
||
"your :menuselection:`Inventory module --> Master Data --> Products` (or in "
|
||
"any other module where products are available)."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:73
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"On the product form, in the *Inventory tab*, you can set a route. You can "
|
||
"choose *Make To Order* and another route, either *Buy* or *Manufacture*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:77
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Again, if the *Buy* route is selected, make sure to set a *Vendor pricelist*"
|
||
" in the *Purchase tab*. In case you have set a *Manufacture* route, make "
|
||
"sure you have a *BoM* for this product."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Resupply from another Warehouse"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In order to be able to resupply from another warehouse, you need to activate"
|
||
" \\*multi-warehouses\\* and \\*multi-step routes\\*. Storage locations will "
|
||
"be automatically activated when activating multi-warehouses."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:16
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can then access your warehouses via :menuselection:`Inventory --> "
|
||
"Configuration --> Warehouses`. Create the necessary warehouses following "
|
||
"this :doc:`documentation <../warehouses/warehouse_creation>`. Enter the "
|
||
"warehouse which should be resupplied by another one. You will have the "
|
||
"possibility to directly indicate through which warehouse it gets resupplied."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:26
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"By activating this option, a new route will now be available on your "
|
||
"products \\*Supply Product from Second warehouse\\*. It can now be selected,"
|
||
" along with either a \\*reordering rule\\* or a \\*make to order\\*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:34
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"For the demonstration, I set a reordering rule with a minimum of 5 units in "
|
||
"stock and a maximum of 10 units in stock, having currently 0 units on hand. "
|
||
"I will run the scheduler by going to :menuselection:`Inventory --> "
|
||
"Operations --> Run scheduler`."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:42
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The system automatically creates two pickings, one \\*delivery order\\* from"
|
||
" my Second Warehouse which contains the necessary products, and a receipt in"
|
||
" my main warehouse WH/Stock for the same products. The source document is "
|
||
"the \\*reordering rule\\* which triggered the route \\*Supply Product from "
|
||
"Second warehouse\\*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Valuation Methods"
|
||
msgstr "методы оценки"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/integrating_landed_costs.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Integrating additional costs to products (landed costs)"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/integrating_landed_costs.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The landed cost feature in Odoo allows to include additional costs "
|
||
"(shipment, insurance, customs duties, etc.) into the cost of the product."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/integrating_landed_costs.rst:10
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Landed costs can only be applied to products with a FIFO or AVCO costing "
|
||
"method and an automated inventory valuation (which requires the accounting "
|
||
"application to be installed)."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/integrating_landed_costs.rst:17
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"First, you need to go in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> "
|
||
"Settings` and activate the landed costs feature. You can also determine the "
|
||
"default journal in which the landed cost accounting entries will be "
|
||
"recorded."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/integrating_landed_costs.rst:25
|
||
msgid "Add costs to products"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/integrating_landed_costs.rst:28
|
||
msgid "Receive the vendor bill"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/integrating_landed_costs.rst:30
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Let’s imagine I receive a bill from custom duties for a shipment. I’ll tick "
|
||
"the box *Landed Costs* on the vendor bill line."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/integrating_landed_costs.rst:37
|
||
msgid "The landed cost product must be of type service."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/integrating_landed_costs.rst:39
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If this product is always a landed cost, you can also define it on the "
|
||
"product and avoid having to tick the box on each vendor bill."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/integrating_landed_costs.rst:45
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"At the top of my vendor bill, I’ll see a button *create landed costs*. I "
|
||
"click on this button and a landed cost is automatically created. I can now "
|
||
"decide on which picking those additional costs should apply."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/integrating_landed_costs.rst:52
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"I can now click on *Compute* and go in the tab *Valuation Adjustments* to "
|
||
"see the impact on my products costs. The last step is to validate the landed"
|
||
" cost."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/integrating_landed_costs.rst:56
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"I can access the journal entry that has been created by the landed cost by "
|
||
"clicking on the journal entry."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/integrating_landed_costs.rst:63
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You are not forced to start from the vendor bill, you can also go in "
|
||
":menuselection:`Inventory --> Operations --> Landed Costs` and directly "
|
||
"create the landed cost from there."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:5
|
||
msgid "Inventory valuation configuration"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:7
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Inventory valuation refers to how you value your stock. It’s a very "
|
||
"important aspect of a business as the inventory can be the biggest asset of "
|
||
"a company."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:11
|
||
msgid "Inventory valuation implies two main choices:"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:13
|
||
msgid "The cost method you use to value your goods (standard, fifo, avco)"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:14
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The way you record this value into your accounting books (manually or "
|
||
"automatically)"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:16
|
||
msgid "Those two concepts are explained in the sections below."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:19
|
||
msgid "Costing Methods: Standard, FIFO, AVCO"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:21
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The costing method is defined in the product category. There are three "
|
||
"options available. Each of them is explained in detail below."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:69
|
||
msgid "Standard Price"
|
||
msgstr "Стандартная цена"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:34
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:79
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:125
|
||
msgid "Operation"
|
||
msgstr "Операция"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:35
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:80
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:126
|
||
msgid "Unit Cost"
|
||
msgstr "Себестоимость единицы"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:36
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:81
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:127
|
||
msgid "Qty On Hand"
|
||
msgstr "Количество в наличии"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:37
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:82
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:128
|
||
msgid "Delta Value"
|
||
msgstr "значение дельты"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:38
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:83
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:129
|
||
msgid "Inventory Value"
|
||
msgstr "Величина запасов"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:40
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:45
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:50
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:55
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:61
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:90
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:136
|
||
msgid "€10"
|
||
msgstr "€10"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:41
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:86
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:132
|
||
msgid "0"
|
||
msgstr "0"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:43
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:85
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:88
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:131
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:134
|
||
msgid "€0"
|
||
msgstr "€0"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:44
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:89
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:135
|
||
msgid "Receive 8 Products at €10"
|
||
msgstr "Получить 8 товаров за 10 евро"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:46
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:91
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:137
|
||
msgid "8"
|
||
msgstr "8"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:47
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:92
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:138
|
||
msgid "+8*€10"
|
||
msgstr "+8*€10"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:48
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:93
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:139
|
||
msgid "€80"
|
||
msgstr "€80"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:49
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:94
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:140
|
||
msgid "Receive 4 Products at €16"
|
||
msgstr "Получить 4 товара за € 16"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:51
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:96
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:142
|
||
msgid "12"
|
||
msgstr "12"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:52
|
||
msgid "+4*€10"
|
||
msgstr "+4*€10"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:53
|
||
msgid "€120"
|
||
msgstr "€120"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:54
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:99
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:145
|
||
msgid "Deliver 10 Products"
|
||
msgstr "Доставить 10 товаров"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:56
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:101
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:147
|
||
msgid "2"
|
||
msgstr "2"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:0
|
||
msgid "-10*€10"
|
||
msgstr "-10*€10"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:59
|
||
msgid "€20"
|
||
msgstr "€20"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:60
|
||
msgid "Receive 2 Products at €9"
|
||
msgstr "Получить 2 товара за € 9"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:62
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:107
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:153
|
||
msgid "4"
|
||
msgstr "4"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:63
|
||
msgid "+2*€10"
|
||
msgstr "+2*€10"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:64
|
||
msgid "€40"
|
||
msgstr "€40"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:66
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In **Standard Price**, any product will be valued at the cost that you "
|
||
"defined manually on the product form. Usually, this cost is an estimation "
|
||
"based on the material and labor needed to obtain the product. This cost must"
|
||
" be reviewed periodically."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:115
|
||
msgid "Average Price"
|
||
msgstr "Средняя цена"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:95
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:100
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:141
|
||
msgid "€12"
|
||
msgstr "€12"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:97
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:143
|
||
msgid "+4*€16"
|
||
msgstr "+4*€16"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:98
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:144
|
||
msgid "€144"
|
||
msgstr "€144"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:0
|
||
msgid "-10*€12"
|
||
msgstr "-10*€12"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:104
|
||
msgid "€24"
|
||
msgstr "€24"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:105
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:151
|
||
msgid "Receive 2 Products at €6"
|
||
msgstr "Получить 2 товара за € 6"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:106
|
||
msgid "€9"
|
||
msgstr "€9"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:108
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:154
|
||
msgid "+2*€6"
|
||
msgstr "+2*€6"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:109
|
||
msgid "€36"
|
||
msgstr "€36"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:111
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In **AVCO (Average Cost)**, each product has the same value and this value "
|
||
"is the average purchase cost of the product. With this costing method, the "
|
||
"cost of the product is recomputed as each receipt."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:115
|
||
msgid "The average cost does not change when products leave the warehouse."
|
||
msgstr "Средняя стоимость не меняется, когда товары забирают со склада."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:166
|
||
msgid "FIFO"
|
||
msgstr "FIFO"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:146
|
||
msgid "€16"
|
||
msgstr "€16"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:0
|
||
msgid "-8*€10"
|
||
msgstr "-8*€10"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:0
|
||
msgid "-2*€16"
|
||
msgstr "-2*€16"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:150
|
||
msgid "€32"
|
||
msgstr "€32"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:152
|
||
msgid "€11"
|
||
msgstr "€11"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:155
|
||
msgid "€44"
|
||
msgstr "€44"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:157
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In **FIFO (First In First Out)**, the products are valued at their purchase "
|
||
"cost. When a product leaves the stock, that’s the “First in, first out” rule"
|
||
" that applies."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:161
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Pay attention, that this is a financial FIFO. The first value “in” is the "
|
||
"first value “out”, no matter the storage location, warehouse or serial "
|
||
"number."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:165
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"FIFO is advised if you manage all your workflows into Odoo (Sales, "
|
||
"Purchases, Inventory). It suits any kind of users."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:169
|
||
msgid "Inventory Valuation: Manual or Automated"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:171
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"There are two ways to record your inventory valuation in your accounting "
|
||
"books. As the costing method, this is defined in your product category. "
|
||
"Those two methods are detailed below."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:175
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"It is important to also note that the accounting entries will depend on your"
|
||
" accounting mode: it can be continental or anglo-saxon. In continental "
|
||
"accounting, the cost of a good is taken into account as soon as the product "
|
||
"is received in stock. In anglo-saxon accounting, the cost of a good is only "
|
||
"recorded as an expense when this good is invoiced to a final customer. In "
|
||
"the tables below, you can easily compare those two accounting modes."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:183
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Usually, based on your country, the correct accounting mode will be chosen "
|
||
"by default. If you want to verify your accounting mode, activate the "
|
||
":doc:`Developer mode <../../../general/developer_mode/activate>` and open "
|
||
"your accounting settings."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:189
|
||
msgid "Manual Inventory Valuation"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:191
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In this case, goods receipts and deliveries won’t have any direct impact on "
|
||
"your accounting books. Periodically, you create a manual journal entry "
|
||
"representing the value of what you have in stock. To know that value, go in "
|
||
":menuselection:`Inventory --> Reporting --> Inventory Valuation`."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:196
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"This is the default configuration in Odoo and it works out-of-the-box. Check"
|
||
" following operations and find out how Odoo is managing the accounting "
|
||
"postings."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Это настройки по умолчанию в Odoo, и оно работает вне коробки. Проверьте "
|
||
"следующие операции и узнайте, как Odoo руководит бухгалтерскими сообщениями."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:201
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:360
|
||
msgid "Continental Accounting"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:218
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:292
|
||
msgid "Vendor Bill"
|
||
msgstr "Счет от поставщика"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:209
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:226
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:260
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:282
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:300
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:339
|
||
msgid "\\"
|
||
msgstr "\\"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:209
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:226
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:260
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:282
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:300
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:339
|
||
msgid "Debit"
|
||
msgstr "Дебет"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:209
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:226
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:260
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:282
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:300
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:339
|
||
msgid "Credit"
|
||
msgstr "Кредит"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:211
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:262
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:284
|
||
msgid "Assets: Inventory"
|
||
msgstr "Активы состав"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:211
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:284
|
||
msgid "50"
|
||
msgstr "50"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:212
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:285
|
||
msgid "Assets: Deferred Tax Assets"
|
||
msgstr "Активы: отсроченные налоговые активы"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:212
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:285
|
||
msgid "4.68"
|
||
msgstr "4.68"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:213
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:286
|
||
msgid "Liabilities: Accounts Payable"
|
||
msgstr "Обязанности: кредиторская задолженность"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:213
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:286
|
||
msgid "54.68"
|
||
msgstr "54.68"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:218
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:236
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:292
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:311
|
||
msgid "Configuration:"
|
||
msgstr "настройки:"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:217
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:290
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Purchased Goods: defined on the product or on the internal category of "
|
||
"related product (Expense Account field)"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Приобретенные товары: определены на товаре или на внутренний категории "
|
||
"соответствующего товара (поле счета расходов)"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:218
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:292
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Deferred Tax Assets: defined on the tax used on the purchase order line"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Будущие налоговые активы: определяется налогом, используемого на строку "
|
||
"заказа на приобретение"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:219
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:293
|
||
msgid "Accounts Payable: defined on the vendor related to the bill"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Кредиторская задолженность: определяется поставщиком, связанным со счетом"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:220
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:294
|
||
msgid "Goods Receptions"
|
||
msgstr "прием товаров"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:221
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:241
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:243
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:295
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:316
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:318
|
||
msgid "No Journal Entry"
|
||
msgstr "Есть журнальных записей"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:238
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:313
|
||
msgid "Customer Invoice"
|
||
msgstr "Счет клиента"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:228
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:302
|
||
msgid "Revenues: Sold Goods"
|
||
msgstr "Доходы: проданные товары"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:228
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:302
|
||
msgid "100"
|
||
msgstr "100"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:229
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:303
|
||
msgid "Liabilities: Deferred Tax Liabilities"
|
||
msgstr "Обязанности: отсроченные налоговые обязательства"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:229
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:303
|
||
msgid "9"
|
||
msgstr "9"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:230
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:304
|
||
msgid "Assets: Accounts Receivable"
|
||
msgstr "Активы: дебиторская задолженность"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:230
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:304
|
||
msgid "109"
|
||
msgstr "109"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:234
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:308
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Revenues: defined on the product or on the internal category of related "
|
||
"product (Income Account field)"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Доходы: определяются по товару или по внутренней категорией соответствующего"
|
||
" товара (поле Текущий счет)"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:235
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:310
|
||
msgid "Deferred Tax Liabilities: defined on the tax used on the invoice line"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Налоговые обязательства будущих периодов: определяется налогом, "
|
||
"используемого на строке счета-фактуры"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:236
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:311
|
||
msgid "Accounts Receivable: defined on the customer (Receivable Account)"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Дебиторская задолженность: определяется на клиента (счет на получение)"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:238
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:313
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The fiscal position used on the invoice may have a rule that replaces the "
|
||
"Income Account or the tax defined on the product by another one."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Схема налогообложения, использованная в счете-фактуре, может иметь правило, "
|
||
"заменяет учет доходов или налог, определенный на товаре другим."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:240
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:315
|
||
msgid "Customer Shipping"
|
||
msgstr "клиентская доставка"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:243
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:318
|
||
msgid "Manufacturing Orders"
|
||
msgstr "Производственные заявки"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:249
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:324
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"At the end of the month/year, your company does a physical inventory or just"
|
||
" relies on the inventory in Odoo to value the stock into your books."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"В конце месяца / года ваша компания осуществляет физическую инвентаризацию "
|
||
"или просто опирается на склад в Odoo, чтобы оценить запас в ваши книги."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:252
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Create a journal entry to move the stock variation value from your "
|
||
"Profit&Loss section to your assets."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Создайте запись журнала, чтобы переместить стоимость запасов в разделе Доход"
|
||
" и потери в своих активов."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:262
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:263
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:341
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:342
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:343
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:344
|
||
msgid "X"
|
||
msgstr "X"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:263
|
||
msgid "Expenses: Inventory Variations"
|
||
msgstr "Расходы: варианты инвентаризации"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:266
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If the stock value decreased, the **Inventory** account is credited and te "
|
||
"**Inventory Variations** debited."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Если снизилась стоимость состава, ** Состав ** счет зачисляется и ** "
|
||
"Варианты инвентаризации ** дебетуются."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:274
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:387
|
||
msgid "Anglo-Saxon Accounting"
|
||
msgstr "Англо-саксонской учет"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:327
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Then you need to break down the purchase balance into both the inventory and"
|
||
" the cost of goods sold using the following formula:"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Тогда вам нужно разбить баланс покупки как инвентаризацию, так и стоимость "
|
||
"проданных товаров по следующей формуле:"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:330
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Cost of goods sold (COGS) = Starting inventory value + Purchases – Closing "
|
||
"inventory value"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Стоимость проданных товаров (COGS) = Начальная стоимость запаса + Покупки - "
|
||
"Завершение инвентаризации"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:332
|
||
msgid "To update the stock valuation in your books, record such an entry:"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Чтобы обновить оценку состава в своих книгах, зарегистрируйте следующую "
|
||
"запись:"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:341
|
||
msgid "Assets: Inventory (closing value)"
|
||
msgstr "Активы: Инвентаризация (конечная стоимость)"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:342
|
||
msgid "Expenses: Cost of Good Sold"
|
||
msgstr "Расходы: стоимость проданных товаров"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:343
|
||
msgid "Expenses: Purchased Goods"
|
||
msgstr "Расходы: приобретенные товары"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:344
|
||
msgid "Assets: Inventory (starting value)"
|
||
msgstr "Активы: Инвентаризация (начальное значение)"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:348
|
||
msgid "Automated Inventory Valuation"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:350
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In that case, when a product enters or leaves your stock, an accounting "
|
||
"entry will be automatically created. This means your accounting books are "
|
||
"always up-to-date. This mode is dedicated to expert accountants and advanced"
|
||
" users only. As opposed to periodic valuation, it requires some extra "
|
||
"configuration & testing."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:356
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"First, you need to define the accounts that will be used for those "
|
||
"accounting entries. This is done on the product category."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:372
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:399
|
||
msgid "**Configuration:**"
|
||
msgstr "** Настройка: **"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:374
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:401
|
||
msgid "Accounts Receivable/Payable: defined on the partner (Accounting tab)"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Дебиторская задолженность / кредиторская задолженность: определенная у "
|
||
"партнера (вкладка Учет)"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:376
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:403
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Deferred Tax Assets/Liabilities: defined on the tax used on the invoice line"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Отсроченные налоговые активы / обязательства: определяется налогом, "
|
||
"используемого на строке счета-фактуры"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:378
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Revenues/Expenses: defined by default on product's internal category; can be"
|
||
" also set in product form (Accounting tab) as a replacement value."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Доходы / расходы: определяются по умолчанию на внутреннюю категорию товара; "
|
||
"также может быть установлен в форме товара (вкладка Бухучет) как значение "
|
||
"замены."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:381
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Inventory Variations: to set as Stock Input/Output Account in product's "
|
||
"internal category"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Варианты инвентаризации: устанавливать как входящий / исходящий аккаунт во "
|
||
"внутренней категории товара"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:384
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:419
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Inventory: to set as Stock Valuation Account in product's internal category"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Инвентаризация: назначать учет стоимости состава во внутренней категории "
|
||
"товара"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:406
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Revenues: defined on the product category as a default, or specifically to a"
|
||
" specific product."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Доходы: определяется как категория товара по умолчанию, или для конкретного "
|
||
"товара."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:409
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Expenses: this is where you should set the \"Cost of Goods Sold\" account. "
|
||
"Defined on the product category as a default value, or specifically on the "
|
||
"product form."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Расходы: здесь вам следует установить учет "Стоимость товаров, "
|
||
"продаваемых". Определены категорию товара как значения по умолчанию или"
|
||
" непосредственно на форме товара."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:413
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Goods Received Not Purchased: to set as Stock Input Account in product's "
|
||
"internal category"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Полученные товары не были приобретены: чтобы установить входной учет во "
|
||
"внутренней категории товара"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:416
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Goods Issued Not Invoiced: to set as Stock Output Account in product's "
|
||
"internal category"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Выпущенные товары не учитываются на счетах: для внутренней категории товара "
|
||
"назначайте учет выходных расходов"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:421
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Price Difference: to set in product's internal category or in product form "
|
||
"as a specific replacement value"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Разница цен: установить во внутренней категории товара или в форме товара "
|
||
"как определенное изменение стоимости"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Using the inventory valuation"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:9
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In this documentation, we will explain how the inventory valuation works in "
|
||
"Odoo."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:13
|
||
msgid "Inventory valuation: the basics"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:16
|
||
msgid "Receive a product"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:18
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Each time a product enters or leaves your stock, the value of your inventory"
|
||
" is impacted. The way it is impacted depends on the configuration of your "
|
||
"product (more info here)."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:22
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Let’s take an example with a product - a table - configured with a *FIFO "
|
||
"costing method* and an automated inventory valuation."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:25
|
||
msgid "I purchase 10 tables at a cost of $10."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:30
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When I’ll confirm the receipt of the products, the value of my inventory "
|
||
"will be impacted. If I want to know what this impact is, I can click on the "
|
||
"valuation stat button."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:35
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The consignment feature allows you to set owners on your stock (discover "
|
||
"more about the consignment feature). When you receive products that are "
|
||
"owned by another company, they are not taken into account in your inventory "
|
||
"valuation."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:44
|
||
msgid "You need access rights on the accounting module to see that button."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:46
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In this case, I can see that the 10 tables entered the stock for a total "
|
||
"value of $100."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:52
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"I can also easily access the accounting entry that has been generated (in "
|
||
"case of automated inventory valuation)."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:59
|
||
msgid "Deliver a product"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:61
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the same logic, when a table will be delivered, the stock valuation will "
|
||
"be impacted and you will have access to a similar information."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:68
|
||
msgid "The inventory valuation report"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:70
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The summary of this is accessible via the inventory valuation report "
|
||
"(accessible from :menuselection:`Inventory --> Reporting --> Inventory "
|
||
"Valuation`). It gives you, product per product, the value of your stock. By "
|
||
"clicking on the button *Inventory At Date*, you can have the same "
|
||
"information for a past date."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Warehouses"
|
||
msgstr "Склады"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:3
|
||
msgid "What is the difference between warehouses and locations?"
|
||
msgstr "Какая разница между составом и местонахождением?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In Odoo, a **Warehouse** is the actual building/place in which your items "
|
||
"are stocked. You can setup multiple warehouses and create moves between "
|
||
"warehouses."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"** Состав ** в Odoo - это фактически здание / место, в котором складируются "
|
||
"ваши товары. Вы можете установить несколько складов и создавать переходы "
|
||
"между ними."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:9
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"A **Location**, is a specific space within your warehouse. It can be "
|
||
"considered as a sublocation of your warehouse, as a shelf, a floor, an "
|
||
"aisle, etc. Therefore, a location is part of one warehouse only and it is "
|
||
"not possible to link one location to multiple warehouses. You can configure "
|
||
"as much locations as you need under one warehouse."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"** Адрес ** - это конкретное место на вашем складе. Оно может "
|
||
"рассматриваться как подразделение вашего склада, полка, пол, проход и т. Д. "
|
||
"Поэтому расположение является частью только одного состава, и невозможно "
|
||
"связать одно местонахождение с несколькими составами. Вы можете настроить "
|
||
"столько местонахождений, сколько вам нужно под одним составом."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:15
|
||
msgid "There are 3 types of locations:"
|
||
msgstr "Существует 3 типа местонахождений:"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:17
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The **Physical Locations** are internal locations that are part of the "
|
||
"warehouses for which you are the owner. They can be the loading and "
|
||
"unloading area of your warehouse, a shelf or a department, etc."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"** Физические местонахождение ** - это внутренние местоположении, является "
|
||
"частью состава, которого вы являетесь владельцем. Они могут быть областью "
|
||
"погрузки и разгрузки вашего склада, полки или отдела и тому подобное."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:21
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The **Partner Locations** are spaces within a customer and/or vendor's "
|
||
"warehouse. They work the same way as Physical Locations with the only "
|
||
"difference being that you are not the owner of the warehouse."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"** Адрес партнеров ** - это пространство на складе клиента и / или "
|
||
"поставщика. Они работают так же, как и в "Физических "
|
||
"местонахождений", но только потому, что вы не являетесь владельцем "
|
||
"склада."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:25
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The **Virtual Locations** are places that do not exist, but in which "
|
||
"products can be placed when they are not physically in an inventory yet (or "
|
||
"anymore). They come in handy when you want to place lost products out of "
|
||
"your stock (in the **Inventory loss**), or when you want to take into "
|
||
"account products that are on their way to your warehouse (**Procurements**)."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"** Виртуальные местонахождение ** - это места, которые не существуют, но в "
|
||
"них можно размещать товары, если они еще не (или более) инвентаризованы. Они"
|
||
" пригодятся, когда вы хотите поместить утраченные товары из вашего запаса (в"
|
||
" ** Потери состава **) или когда вы хотите принять во внимание товары, "
|
||
"которые переходят на ваш склад (** Обеспечение **)."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:31
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In Odoo, locations are structured hierarchically. You can structure your "
|
||
"locations as a tree, dependent on a parent-child relationship. This gives "
|
||
"you more detailed levels of analysis of your stock operations and the "
|
||
"organization of your warehouses."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"В Odoo местонахождение расположены иерархически. Вы можете структурировать "
|
||
"свои местонахождения как дерево, в зависимости от отношений между "
|
||
"родительским и дочерним. Это дает вам более подробный уровень анализа ваших "
|
||
"операций на складе и организации ваших складов."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:37
|
||
msgid ":doc:`warehouse_creation`"
|
||
msgstr ":doc:`warehouse_creation`"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:38
|
||
msgid ":doc:`location_creation`"
|
||
msgstr ":doc:`location_creation`"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Create a New Location"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In order to be able to create different locations, you will need to activate"
|
||
" *Multi-Locations* in the settings which can be done from the "
|
||
":menuselection:`Inventory application --> Configuration --> Settings`."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:15
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the *Inventory application*, you can now go to "
|
||
":menuselection:`Configuration --> Locations` and hit *Create* in order to "
|
||
"create a new location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:21
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Type the name of the location in the *Location Name* field, and select the "
|
||
"*Parent Location* in the list. The parent location can be a physical, "
|
||
"partner or virtual location, and you can add as many sub-locations as needed"
|
||
" to a location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:29
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In case you want the location to be suggested when creating a Return or when"
|
||
" Scrapping a product, you should check *Is a Scrap Location?* and *Is a "
|
||
"Return Location?*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:33
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you have the *Barcode* application installed, you can specify the barcode"
|
||
" which will correspond to this location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:37
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"A warehouse also corresponds to a location. As the locations are "
|
||
"hierarchical, Odoo will create the parent location of the warehouse, "
|
||
"containing all the sublocations in it."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Состав также отвечает местонахождению. Поскольку местонахождение являются "
|
||
"иерархическими, Odoo создаст родительское расположение состава, содержащего "
|
||
"все подклассы в нем."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Create a New Warehouse"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In order to create a new warehouse, you should activate the *Multi-"
|
||
"Warehouse* settings. Note that the *Multi-Locations* settings will be "
|
||
"automatically activated at the same time."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:12
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In order to do so, go to the :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration"
|
||
" --> Settings`."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:18
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can then go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> "
|
||
"Warehouses` and hit *Create* to add a new warehouse."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:24
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You will be able to enter your warehouse name. You should also choose a "
|
||
"short name for your warehouse which is 5-characters long and is used on the "
|
||
"different warehouse documents."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:28
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the Address field, you can select an existing company or create one on-"
|
||
"the-go. Therefore, the address of your warehouse will be the same as the one"
|
||
" of the company you selected. You can also leave this field empty and edit "
|
||
"it afterward."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:36
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"After the creation of your new warehouse, you can go back to the *Dashboard*"
|
||
" and you will see the new operation types automatically created by Odoo due "
|
||
"to the creation of a new warehouse."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Process Overview"
|
||
msgstr "Общий обзор процесса"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:3
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:25
|
||
msgid "Deliver Products from Stock"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:6
|
||
msgid "Create Storable/Consumable Products"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:8
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:5
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The first step to use the inventory application is to create products in "
|
||
"your database via the menu :menuselection:`Master Data --> Products`. Click "
|
||
"the Create button and enter the name of your product."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:15
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:12
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In case you set the product as *storable*, you will track the stock for this"
|
||
" product and know how many units are in stock and what is the forecasted "
|
||
"number of units. If you want to include a product on receipts/deliveries but"
|
||
" don’t need to track its stock, you can set it as *consumable*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:27
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once you have existing products, you can decide to create a delivery to "
|
||
"deliver products to your customers. The process in order to do so is "
|
||
"described in the following print screens."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:37
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"On the delivery order, you can specify to whom the products will be "
|
||
"delivered along with the different products and their respective quantities."
|
||
" When the delivery is complete you can hit *Validate* and the products will "
|
||
"go out of your stock."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:45
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In case you have a delivery that is planned but shouldn’t be immediately "
|
||
"validated, you can create a *planned delivery* with a scheduled date in the "
|
||
"future. You can indicate the initial demand for each product, corresponding "
|
||
"to what has been ordered by your customer. Once the document is filled in, "
|
||
"you can hit “Mark as to do” in order to consider it in your product "
|
||
"forecasts."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:51
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The default setting is the immediate transfer where you do not need to “Mark"
|
||
" as to do” and “Check availability” when delivering a product."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:54
|
||
msgid "Deliver Products from Stock from a Sale Order"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:56
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you have the *Sales* application installed, delivery can be directly "
|
||
"created by *validating a quotation*. You will be able to find the "
|
||
"corresponding delivery directly on the *sale order*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Set your Initial Stock"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:12
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Set the product as *storable*, in order to track the stock for this product "
|
||
"and be able to include it in an inventory adjustment."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:19
|
||
msgid "Inventory Adjustment for Multiple Products"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:21
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once you have created all your *storable products*, you can create an "
|
||
"*inventory adjustment* to determine their current stock level in Odoo. You "
|
||
"therefore need to go to :menuselection:`Operations --> Inventory "
|
||
"Adjustments` and create a new one."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:29
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You have to enter a title for your *inventory adjustment* and you can then "
|
||
"decide if you want to proceed to the *inventory adjustment* of all products "
|
||
"or only some of them. For a first *inventory adjustment*, I suggest you to "
|
||
"keep the *Products* field empty. You can then *Start Inventory*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:38
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you already have some products in stock, Odoo will add the lines with the"
|
||
" theoretical quantity currently in stock. You can also add new lines with "
|
||
"your other products."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:46
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If your products are tracked by Serial/Lot numbers, you will have an "
|
||
"additional column allowing you to specify those for the different units "
|
||
"added to the inventory adjustment."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:50
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Odoo will highlight in red the lines for which there is a difference between"
|
||
" the theoretical quantity on hand, which is automatically computed by the "
|
||
"system, and the counted quantity you manually entered. Once all the "
|
||
"necessary products have been entered, you can hit *Validate Inventory* and "
|
||
"the quantities on hand of your different products will be updated."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:58
|
||
msgid "Inventory Adjustment for one Product"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:60
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"On each storable product, you have access to the *Update Quantity* button."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:66
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When clicking this button, you see the current stock you have for this "
|
||
"product. You can edit the existing lines or create new ones to add stock of "
|
||
"your product in different locations and/or add new serial/lot numbers."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:74
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once you come back to your product, you see that the quantity on hand as "
|
||
"been updated taking your modification into account."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:81
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you work with product variants, the quantity on hand will show you the "
|
||
"total quantity in stock for the product template, taking the different "
|
||
"variants into account."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:85
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"By default, the quantity on hand of the product form will show you the "
|
||
"number of products that are part of your warehouse view location, meaning "
|
||
"which are part of an internal type sub-location of this warehouse. It means "
|
||
"that if you have any product in a location that isn’t under the main "
|
||
"warehouse location, they won’t appear in the stock on hand stat button."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:3
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:22
|
||
msgid "Receive Products in Stock"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:24
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once you have existing products, you can decide to create a receipt to enter"
|
||
" products from your supplier in stock. The process in order to do so is "
|
||
"described in the following print screens."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:34
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"On the receipt document, you can select the quantity of the different "
|
||
"products you receive and the supplier from who you received them. When the "
|
||
"receipt is complete, you can hit *Validate* and the products will enter your"
|
||
" stock."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:42
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In case you have a receipt that is planned but shouldn’t be immediately "
|
||
"validated, you can create a *planned receipt* with a scheduled date in the "
|
||
"future. You can indicate the initial demand for each product, corresponding "
|
||
"to what has been ordered to your supplier. Once the document is filled in, "
|
||
"you can hit “Mark as to do” in order to consider it in your product "
|
||
"forecasts."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:56
|
||
msgid "Receive Products in Stock from Purchase Orders"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:58
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you have the *Purchase* application installed, receipts can be directly "
|
||
"created by validating a *request for quotation*. You will be able to find "
|
||
"the corresponding receipt directly on the *purchase order*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Advanced Routes"
|
||
msgstr "Дополнительные маршруты"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Concepts"
|
||
msgstr "понятие"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Organize a cross-dock in a warehouse"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Cross-docking is the process of sending products that are received directly "
|
||
"to the customers, without making them enter the stock. The trucks are simply"
|
||
" unloaded in a *Cross-Dock* area in order to reorganize products and load "
|
||
"another truck."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:11
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"For more information on how to organize your warehouse, read our blog: `What"
|
||
" is cross-docking and is it for me? <https://www.odoo.com/blog/business-"
|
||
"hacks-1/post/what-is-cross-docking-and-is-it-for-me-270>`__"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:16
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the *Inventory* app, open :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings` and"
|
||
" activate the *Multi-Step Routes*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:22
|
||
msgid "Doing so will also enable the *Storage Locations* feature."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:24
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, both *Incoming* and *Outgoing* shipments should be configured to work "
|
||
"with 2 steps. To adapt the configuration, go to :menuselection:`Inventory "
|
||
"--> Configuration --> Warehouses` and edit your warehouse."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:31
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"This modification will lead to the creation of a *Cross-Docking* route that "
|
||
"can be found in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Routes`."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:38
|
||
msgid "Configure products with Cross-Dock Route"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:40
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Create the product that uses the *Cross-Dock Route* and then, in the "
|
||
"inventory tab, select the routes *Buy* and *Cross-Dock*. Now, in the "
|
||
"purchase tab, specify the vendor to who you buy the product and set a price "
|
||
"for it."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:48
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once done, create a sale order for the product and confirm it. Odoo will "
|
||
"automatically create two transfers which will be linked to the sale order. "
|
||
"The first one is the transfer from the *Input Location* to the *Output "
|
||
"Location*, corresponding to the move of the product in the *Cross-Dock* "
|
||
"area. The second one is the delivery order from the *Output Location* to "
|
||
"your *Customer Location. Both are in state *Waiting Another Operation* "
|
||
"because we still need to order the product to our supplier."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:56
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, go to the *Purchase* app. There, you will find the purchase order that "
|
||
"has been automatically triggered by the system. Validate it and receive the "
|
||
"products in the *Input Location*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:64
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When the products have been received from the supplier, you can go back to "
|
||
"your initial sale order and validate the internal transfer from *Input* to "
|
||
"*Output*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:72
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The delivery order is now ready to be processed and can be validated too."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:3
|
||
msgid "How to do inter-warehouses transfers?"
|
||
msgstr "Как делать внутренне складские перемещения?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you own different warehouses you might want to transfer goods from one "
|
||
"warehouse to the other. This is very easy thanks to the inventory "
|
||
"application in Odoo."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Если у вас есть различные складские помещения, вы можете переместить товары "
|
||
"с одного склада на другой. Это очень просто благодаря склада в Odoo."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:12
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"First of all you have to select the multi locations option. Go to "
|
||
":menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings` in the **Inventory "
|
||
"application**. Then tick the **Manage several locations per warehouse** "
|
||
"option. Please don't forget to **apply** your changes."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Прежде всего вам нужно выбрать вариант нескольких местонахождений. Перейдите"
|
||
" к :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`в приложении ** Состав **. "
|
||
"Затем поставьте галочку на пункте ** Управление несколькими местонахождению "
|
||
"на складе **. Пожалуйста, не забудьте ** применить ** свои изменения."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:21
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"This option should also be ticked if you wish to manage different locations "
|
||
"and routes in your warehouse."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Этот параметр также обозначить, если вы хотите управлять различными "
|
||
"местонахождению и маршрутами на своем складе."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:25
|
||
msgid "Creating a new warehouse"
|
||
msgstr "Создание нового состава"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:27
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The next step is to create your new warehouse. In the Inventory application "
|
||
"click on :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouse Management --> "
|
||
"Warehouses`. You are now able to create your warehouse by clicking on "
|
||
"**Create**."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Следующим шагом является создание вашего нового состава. В программе Состав "
|
||
"нажмите :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouse Management --> "
|
||
"Warehouses`. Теперь вы можете создать свой состав, нажав кнопку ** Создать "
|
||
"**."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:32
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Fill in a **Warehouse Name** and a **Short Name**. The short name is 5 "
|
||
"characters maximum."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Заполните ** название состава ** и ** краткое название **, которая должна "
|
||
"составлять максимум 5 символов."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:39
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Please note that the **Short Name** is very important as it will appear on "
|
||
"your transfer orders and other warehouse documents. It might be smart to use"
|
||
" an understandable one (e.g.: WH/[first letters of location])."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:44
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you go back to your dashboard, new operations will automatically have "
|
||
"been generated for your new warehouse."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Если вы вернетесь на информационную панель, новые операции автоматически "
|
||
"создан для вашего нового состава."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:51
|
||
msgid "Creating a new inventory"
|
||
msgstr "Создание новой инвентаризации"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:53
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you create a new warehouse you might already have an existing physical "
|
||
"inventory in it. In that case you should create an inventory in Odoo, if not"
|
||
" you can skip this step."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Если вы создадите новый состав, у вас может быть доступна существующая "
|
||
"инвентаризация. В таком случае вы должны создать инвентаризацию в Odoo, если"
|
||
" не можете пропустить этот шаг."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:57
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Go into the inventory application, select :menuselection:`Inventory Control "
|
||
"--> Inventory Adjustment`. You can then create a new inventory by clicking "
|
||
"on **Create**. Fill in the **Inventory Reference**, **Date** and be sure to "
|
||
"select the right warehouse and location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Выделите приложение Состав, выберите :menuselection:`Inventory Control --> "
|
||
"Inventory Adjustment`. Затем можно создать новую инвентаризацию, нажав "
|
||
"кнопку ** Создать **. Заполните ** реестр товара **, ** дату ** и "
|
||
"обязательно выберите правильный состав и местонахождения."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:65
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Next, click on **Start Inventory**. A new window will open where you will be"
|
||
" able to input your existing products. Select add an item and indicate the "
|
||
"**Real Quantity** available in the warehouse. The theoretical quantity can "
|
||
"not be changed as it represents a computed quantity from purchase and sales "
|
||
"orders."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Нажмите ** Начать инвентаризацию **. Откроется новое окно, где вы сможете "
|
||
"вводить существующие товары. Выберите добавления элемента и укажите ** "
|
||
"Реальный объем **, имеющийся на складе. Теоретическая количество не может "
|
||
"быть изменена, поскольку она представляет исчисленный объем заказов на "
|
||
"покупку и продажу."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:74
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Don't forget to validate your inventory once you have recorder the state of "
|
||
"all yours product."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Не забудьте проверить свою инвентаризацию, как только у вас запишется этап "
|
||
"всего вашего товара."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:78
|
||
msgid "Create an internal transfer"
|
||
msgstr "Создайте внутреннее перемещение"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:80
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The final step is to create your internal transfer. If you want to tranfer 2"
|
||
" units of a product from your first warehouse to another one in Brussels, "
|
||
"proceed as follows:"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Последний шаг - создание внутреннего перемещения. Если вы хотите переместить"
|
||
" две единицы товара с вашего первого склада на другой, который находится "
|
||
"именно в Брюсселе, выполните следующие действия:"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:84
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"From your dashboard, select a internal movement of one of the two "
|
||
"warehouses. To do so, click on :menuselection:`More --> Transfer`."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"На информационной панели выберите внутреннее перемещение одного из двух "
|
||
"слогов. Для этого нажмите :menuselection:`More --> Transfer`."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:90
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"A new window will open where you will be able to select the source location "
|
||
"zone (in this case our \"old warehouse\") and the destination location zone "
|
||
"(in this case our \"new\" warehouse located in Brussels)."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Откроется новое окно, где вы можете выбрать зону местонахождение источника "
|
||
"(в этом случае наш "старый состав») и зону местонахождение назначения "
|
||
"(в данном случае наш "новый состав" расположен в Брюсселе)."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:94
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Add the products you want to transfer by clicking on **Add an Item** and "
|
||
"don't forget to **Validate** or **Mark as TODO** once you are done."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Добавьте товары, которые вы хотите передать, нажав ** Добавить объект **, и "
|
||
"не забудьте ** проверить ** или ** обозначить как СДЕЛАТЬ **, когда вы "
|
||
"закончите."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:100
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you select **Validate**, Odoo will process all quantities to transfer."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Если вы выберете ** Проверить **, Odoo будет обрабатывать все перечисленные "
|
||
"величины."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:102
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you select **Mark as TODO**, Odoo will put the transfer in **Waiting "
|
||
"Availability** status. Click on **Reserve** to reserve the amount of "
|
||
"products in your source warehouse."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Если вы выберете ** Отметить как СДЕЛАТЬ ***, Odoo поставит перемещения в "
|
||
"статус ** ожидания **. Нажмите ** Резерв **, чтобы зарезервировать "
|
||
"количество товаров на своем исходном составе."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:106
|
||
msgid "It is also possible to manually transfer each product:"
|
||
msgstr "Можно также вручную переместить каждый товар:"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:108
|
||
msgid "Via your dashboard, select the transfer order in the source location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"С помощью информационной панели выберите замолвння на перемещение в "
|
||
"местонахождении источника."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:113
|
||
msgid "Select the right transfer order"
|
||
msgstr "Выберите правильный заказ на перемещение"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:118
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"3. Click on the little pencil logo in the lower right corner in order to "
|
||
"open the operation details window. In this new window you can manually "
|
||
"indicate how much products you process"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"3. Нажмите на маленький логотип карандаша в нижнем правом углу, чтобы "
|
||
"открыть окно деталей операции. В этом новом окне вы можете вручную указать, "
|
||
"сколько товаров вы обрабатываете"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:126
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you decide to partially process the transfer order (e.g. a part of the "
|
||
"products can't be shipped yet due to an unexpected event), Odoo will "
|
||
"automatically ask if you wish to create a **backorder**. Create a backorder "
|
||
"if you expect to process the remaining products later, do not create a "
|
||
"backorder if you will not supply/receive the remaining products."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Если вы решите частично обрабатывать заказы на перемещение (например, часть "
|
||
"товаров еще не может быть отправлена через неожиданную событие), Odoo "
|
||
"автоматически спросит, хотите ли вы создать ** обратное заказ **. Создайте "
|
||
"обратной логотип, если вы хотите позже обработать товары, оставшиеся не "
|
||
"создавайте обратное заказ, если вы не придаете / не получите другие товары."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Taking stock from different warehouses"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When you plan to deliver a customer, you don’t know in advance if the "
|
||
"products will come from Warehouse A or Warehouse B. You may, in some cases, "
|
||
"need to take stock from different warehouses. With *Odoo*, you can configure"
|
||
" this by using the concept of virtual warehouses. Let us show you how to set"
|
||
" those virtual warehouses."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:8
|
||
msgid "Set up virtual warehouses"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:10
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Let’s say you have two warehouses: Warehouse A and Warehouse B. Create a new"
|
||
" warehouse, that will be a virtual one. It will allow you to take the stock "
|
||
"from A or B. To do so, go to your inventory app settings and enable the "
|
||
"multi-warehouses feature. Then, go to the warehouses menu and click on "
|
||
"create."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:16
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The *Storage Location* feature will be automatically enabled. Good news, "
|
||
"because you will need it later in the process."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:18
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, you have to make sure that the main stock locations of warehouse A and "
|
||
"warehouse B are children locations of the main stock location of warehouse A"
|
||
" + B. Go to the locations menu, and edit the main location of your two "
|
||
"warehouses. Then, change their parent location to main location of warehouse"
|
||
" A+B."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:24
|
||
msgid "Sell a product from the virtual warehouse"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:26
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Let’s say you have two products, one stored in warehouse A and one stored in"
|
||
" warehouse B. Now, you can create a new quotation for one of each product. "
|
||
"Go to other information and choose Warehouse A+B in the shipping "
|
||
"information."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:31
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once you have done it, you can convert it to a sales order. Then, a delivery"
|
||
" order will be automatically generated, with a product reserved in warehouse"
|
||
" A and one in warehouse B."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Using Routes and Pull/Push Rules"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In inventory management, the supply chain strategy determines when products "
|
||
"should be fabricated, delivered to distribution centers, and made available "
|
||
"in the retail channel."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:9
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"This kind of strategic process can be configured using *Routes*, featuring "
|
||
"*Pull and Push Rules*. Once everything is properly configured, the inventory"
|
||
" app can automatically generate transfers following the instructions given "
|
||
"by the rules. Yes, Odoo simplifies your life."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:16
|
||
msgid "Inside the warehouse"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:18
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Let’s imagine a generic warehouse plan, where you can find receiving docks, "
|
||
"a quality control area, storage locations, picking and packing areas, and "
|
||
"shipping docks. All products go through all these locations, which also "
|
||
"trigger all the route's rules."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:27
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In this example, vendor trucks unload pallets of ordered goods at receiving "
|
||
"docks. Operators then scan the products in the receiving area. Some of these"
|
||
" products are sent to a quality control area (those devoted to being used "
|
||
"during the manufacturing process, for example), while others are directly "
|
||
"stored in their respective locations."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:36
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Here is an example of a fulfillment route. In the morning, items are picked "
|
||
"for all the orders that need to be prepared during the day. These items are "
|
||
"picked from storage locations and moved to the picking area, close to where "
|
||
"the orders are packed. Then, the orders are packed in their respective boxes"
|
||
" and conveyors bring them close to the shipping docks, ready to be delivered"
|
||
" to customers."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:48
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:45
|
||
msgid "How does it work?"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:51
|
||
msgid "Pull Rules"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:53
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"With *Pull Rules*, a demand for some products triggers procurements, while "
|
||
"*Push Rules* are triggered by products arriving in a specific location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:57
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"We can say that *Pull Rules* are used to fulfill a customer order, a sale "
|
||
"order. So, Odoo generates a need at the *Customer Location* for each product"
|
||
" in the order. Because *Pull Rules* are triggered by a need, Odoo looks for "
|
||
"a *Pull Rule* defined on the *Customer Location*. In our case, a delivery "
|
||
"order pull rule that transfers products from the *Shipping Area* to the "
|
||
"*Customer Location* is found, and a transfer between the two locations is "
|
||
"created."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:65
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Then, Odoo finds another pull rule that tries to fulfill the need for the "
|
||
"*Shipping Area*: the *Packing Rule* that transfers products from the "
|
||
"*Packing Area* to the *Shipping Area*. And, finally, other rules are "
|
||
"triggered until a transfer between the *Stock* and the *Picking Area* is "
|
||
"created."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:72
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"All theses transfers are pre-generated by Odoo, starting from the end and "
|
||
"going backwards. While working, the operator process these transfers in the "
|
||
"opposite order: first the picking, then the packing, then the delivery "
|
||
"order."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:77
|
||
msgid "Push Rules"
|
||
msgstr "Push Правила"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:79
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"On the other hand, *Push Rules* are much easier to understand. Instead of "
|
||
"pre-generating documents based on needs, they are live-triggered when "
|
||
"products arrive in a specific location. *Push Rules* basically say: \"when a"
|
||
" product arrives at a specific location, move it to another location.\""
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:84
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"A simple example would be: when a product arrives in the *Receipt Area*, "
|
||
"move them to the *Storage Location*. As different rules can be applied to "
|
||
"different products, you can assign different storage locations for different"
|
||
" products."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:89
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Another rule could be: when products arrive at a location, move them to the "
|
||
"*Quality Control Area*. Then, once the quality check is done, move them to "
|
||
"their *Storage Location*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:94
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"*Push Rules* can be triggered only if no *Pull Rule* pre-generated the "
|
||
"upstream transfers."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:98
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Sets of rules like those are called routes. The grouping on the rule defines"
|
||
" how products are grouped in the same transfer or not. For example, during "
|
||
"the picking operation, all orders are grouped in one transfer, whereas the "
|
||
"packing operation respects the grouping per customer order."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:105
|
||
msgid "Use Routes and Rules"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:107
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Since *Routes* are a collection of *Push and Pull Rules*, Odoo helps you "
|
||
"manage advanced routes configuration such as:"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:110
|
||
msgid "Manage product manufacturing chains;"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:111
|
||
msgid "Manage default locations per product;"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:112
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Define routes within your warehouse according to business needs, such as "
|
||
"quality control, after-sales services, or supplier returns;"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:114
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Help rental management by generating automated return moves for rented "
|
||
"products."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:117
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To configure a route such as one of those above, open the **Inventory "
|
||
"Application** and go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`. Then, "
|
||
"enable the *Multi-Step Routes* feature."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:126
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The *Storage Locations* feature is automatically activated with the *Multi-"
|
||
"Step Routes*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:129
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once this first step is completed, you have the choice between pre-"
|
||
"configured routes or custom ones. Both are explained below."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:133
|
||
msgid "Pre-configured Routes"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:135
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Odoo’s pre-configured routes are available in the warehouses’ menu. To find "
|
||
"it, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Warehouses`. "
|
||
"There, open your warehouse and edit it to see the pre-configured routes for "
|
||
"incoming and outgoing shipments."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:144
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Some more advanced routes, such as pick-pack-ship, are already configured to"
|
||
" make your life easier. Those are based on your choice for shipments. Once "
|
||
"you made your choice, head to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration "
|
||
"--> Routes` to see the routes Odoo generated for you."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:153
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Opening one of those routes allows you to see on what you can apply the "
|
||
"route. Here, all the selected product categories in the *YourCompany* "
|
||
"warehouse are set up to follow the 3-steps route."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:161
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Easier for many businesses, this process might not fit yours. Thus, you can "
|
||
"configure custom routes in which you can define your own rules, but also the"
|
||
" source and destination location of each action. As an example, here are the"
|
||
" rules for the pre-configured route."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:171
|
||
msgid "Custom Routes"
|
||
msgstr "Настройка маршрутов"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:173
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To create a custom route, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration "
|
||
"--> Routes`, click on create, and choose the places where this route can be "
|
||
"selected. Of course, combinations are available."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:182
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Each place has a different behavior, so it is important to tick only the "
|
||
"useful ones and adapt each route accordingly."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:185
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When applying the route on a product category (:menuselection:`Inventory -->"
|
||
" Configuration --> Product Categories`), all the rules configured in the "
|
||
"route are applied to **every** product of the category. For example, this "
|
||
"can be useful if you use the dropshipping process for all the products from "
|
||
"the same category."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:195
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The same behavior applies to the warehouses. If you tick *Warehouses*, all "
|
||
"the transfers occurring inside the chosen warehouse, and meeting the "
|
||
"conditions of the linked rules, then follow that route."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:203
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"For the *Sales Order Lines*, it is more or less the opposite. You have to "
|
||
"choose the route yourself when creating a quotation. This is pretty useful "
|
||
"if some products go through different routes."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:211
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you work with this kind of route, it is important to keep in mind that it"
|
||
" must be selected on the sales order, such as below."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:218
|
||
msgid "Then, the route can be chosen on each line of the document."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:224
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Finally, there are routes that can be applied to products. Those work more "
|
||
"or less like the product categories: once selected, you have to manually set"
|
||
" on which product it must be applied."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:232
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To do so, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Master Data --> Products` and "
|
||
"open the one on which you want to apply the route. Then go to the *Inventory"
|
||
" tab* and select the route you’ve created."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:240
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If, prima facie, the routes’ configuration can appear quite easy, don’t "
|
||
"forget that we haven’t set up any rule yet. If not harder to set up, those "
|
||
"are vital to have working routings."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:245
|
||
msgid "Rules"
|
||
msgstr "Правила"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:247
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The rules are to be defined on the routes. To do so, go to "
|
||
":menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Routes`, then to the *Rules*"
|
||
" section, and click on *Add a line* button."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:255
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The available rules trigger various actions. If Odoo offers *Push* and "
|
||
"*Pull* rules, others are also available. Here are some explanations for all "
|
||
"of them:"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:259
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Pull From**: this rule is triggered by a need for the product in a "
|
||
"specific stock location. The need can come from a sale order which has been "
|
||
"validated or for a manufacturing order which requires a specific component. "
|
||
"When the need appears in the source location, Odoo generates a picking to "
|
||
"fulfill this need."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:264
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Push To**: this rule is triggered by the arrival of some products in the "
|
||
"defined source location. In case you move products to the source location, "
|
||
"Odoo generates a picking to move those products to the destination location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:268
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Push & Pull**: it allows to generate pickings in the two different "
|
||
"situations explained above. It means that when products are required at a "
|
||
"specific location, a transfer is created from the previous location to "
|
||
"fulfill that need. Then, a need is created in the previous location and a "
|
||
"rule is triggered to fulfill it. Once the second need fulfilled, the "
|
||
"products are pushed to the first location and all the needs are fulfilled."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:274
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Buy**: when products are needed at the destination location, a request for"
|
||
" quotation is created to fulfill the need."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:276
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Manufacture**: when products are needed in the source location, a "
|
||
"manufacturing order is created to fulfill the need."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:283
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You must also define the *Operation Type*. This operation allows defining "
|
||
"which kind of picking is created from the rule. With our above screenshot, "
|
||
"the created picking is, for example, an internal transfer."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:288
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"On the other hand, the *Supply Method*, allows defining what happens at the "
|
||
"source location:"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:291
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Take From Stock**: the products are taken from the available stock of the "
|
||
"source location;"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:293
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Trigger Another Rule**: the system tries to find a stock rule to bring the"
|
||
" products to the source location. The available stock is ignored."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:296
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Take From Stock, if Unavailable, Trigger Another Rule**: the products are "
|
||
"taken from the available stock of the source location. If there is no stock "
|
||
"available, the system tries to find a rule to bring the products to the "
|
||
"source location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:301
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the *Scheduling* section, you can determine how Odoo behaves when one of "
|
||
"the chain's pickings is rescheduled. In case you decide to **Propagate "
|
||
"Rescheduling**, the next move is also to be rescheduled. If you prefer "
|
||
"having the choice to reschedule the next move, you can decide to receive an "
|
||
"alert in the form of a *next activity*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:309
|
||
msgid "What about a full flow?"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:311
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Do you remember our Pick - Pack - Ship custom route? Let’s use it to try a "
|
||
"full flow with an advanced custom route."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:314
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"First, a quick look at our rules and their supply methods: we have three "
|
||
"rules, all **Pull From** rules. The supply methods are the following:"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:318
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Take From Stock**: When products are needed in WH/Packing Zone, *Picks* "
|
||
"(internal transfers from WH/Stock to WH/Packing Zone) are created from "
|
||
"WH/Stock to fulfill the need."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:321
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Trigger Another Rule**: When products are needed in WH/Output, *Packs* "
|
||
"(internal transfers from WH/Packing Zone to WH/Output) are created from "
|
||
"WH/Packing Zone to fulfill the need."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:324
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Trigger Another Rule**: When products are needed in Partner "
|
||
"Locations/Customers, Delivery Orders are created from WH/Output to fulfill "
|
||
"the need."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:332
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"This means that, when a customer orders products, a delivery order is "
|
||
"created to fulfill the order."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:340
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If the source document is the same sale order, the status is not the same. "
|
||
"In fact, the status is **Waiting Another Operation** if the previous "
|
||
"transfer in the list is not done yet."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:348
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To prepare the order, conveyors need products packed at the output area, so "
|
||
"an internal transfer is requested from the packing zone."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:355
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Obviously, the packing zone needs products ready to be packed. So, an "
|
||
"internal transfer is requested to the stock and employees can gather the "
|
||
"required products from the warehouse."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:363
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"As explained in this documentation introduction, the last step in the "
|
||
"process (here the delivery order) is the first to be triggered, which then "
|
||
"triggers other rules until we reach the first step in the process (here, the"
|
||
" internal transfer from to stock to the packing area). Now, everything is "
|
||
"ready to be processed so the customer can get the ordered items."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use-routes.rst:370
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In our case, the product is delivered to the customer when all the rules "
|
||
"have been triggered and the transfers done."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Putaway & Removal Strategies"
|
||
msgstr "Стратегии исправления и удаления"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:3
|
||
msgid "What is a Putaway Rule?"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"A good warehouse implementation takes care that products automatically move "
|
||
"to their appropriate destination location. To make that process easier, Odoo"
|
||
" uses *Putaway rules*. But what is a putaway rule? Putaway is the process of"
|
||
" taking products off the receiving shipments and directly putting them into "
|
||
"the most appropriate location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:7
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If, for example, a warehouse contains volatile substances, it is important "
|
||
"to make sure that certain products are not stored close to each other "
|
||
"because of a potential chemical reaction. That’s where putaway rules "
|
||
"intervene, to avoid storing products wrongly."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:12
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the *Inventory* app, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings` "
|
||
"and activate the *Multi-Step Routes*. By doing so, the *Storage Locations* "
|
||
"will be automatically activated."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:19
|
||
msgid "Setting up a Putaway Rule"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:21
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In some cases, like for a retail shop storing vegetables and fruits, we have"
|
||
" to store products in different locations to maintain product quality."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:23
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Let’s suppose there are one warehouse location *WH/Stock* and two sub-"
|
||
"locations *WH/Stock/Vegatable* and *WH/Stock/Fruits*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:25
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To manage those locations, we will create putaway rules. To do so, open the "
|
||
"*Inventory* app and go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Putaway Rules`. "
|
||
"Then, click on create and configure your first rule indicating the main "
|
||
"location the product will enter before being redirected to the right "
|
||
"location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:31
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The putaway rules can be defined either per product or per product category."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:36
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, if I purchase apples and carrots to my supplier, they will be grouped "
|
||
"in the same receipt but redirected to the right location automatically, "
|
||
"thanks to putaway rules. This information is available from *Inventory "
|
||
"Report*, under the reporting menu."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:3
|
||
msgid "What is a Removal Strategy (FIFO, LIFO, and FEFO)?"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Usually, *Removal Strategies* are defined in picking operations to select "
|
||
"the best products to optimize the distance for the worker, for quality "
|
||
"control purposes, or to first move the products with the closest expiration "
|
||
"date."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:9
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When a product movement needs to be done, Odoo finds available products that"
|
||
" can be assigned to the transfer. The way Odoo assigns these products "
|
||
"depends on the *Removal Strategy* defined in the *Product Category* or on "
|
||
"the *Location*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:14
|
||
msgid "What happens inside the warehouse?"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:16
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Imagine a generic warehouse plan, with receiving docks and area, storage "
|
||
"locations, picking and packing areas, and shipping docks. All products go "
|
||
"through all these locations, but some rules, such as removal strategies, can"
|
||
" have an effect on which products are taken for the pickings."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:24
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Here, vendor trucks unload pallets of goods at the docks. Then, operators "
|
||
"scan the products in the receiving area, with the receiving date and, if the"
|
||
" product has an expiration date, the expiration date. After that, products "
|
||
"are stored in their respective locations."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:32
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Next, several orders for the same product are made, but you didn’t receive "
|
||
"the goods the same day and they don’t have the same expiration date. In that"
|
||
" situation, you logically prefer sending those with the closest date first. "
|
||
"Depending on the removal strategy you chose, Odoo generates a transfer with "
|
||
"the products fitting your settings the best."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:42
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"On the transfer form, you can find the product’s lot/serial number to pick "
|
||
"for delivery."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:48
|
||
msgid "First In, First Out (FIFO)"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:50
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When using a **First In, First Out** strategy, a demand for some products "
|
||
"triggers a removal rule which requests a transfer for the lot/serial number "
|
||
"that has entered your stock the first."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:53
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To be clearer, let’s imagine that you have three lots of nails in your "
|
||
"warehouse. Those three have the following lot numbers: 00001, 00002, 00003, "
|
||
"each with 5 nails boxes in it. 00001 entered the stock on the 23rd of May, "
|
||
"00002 on the 25th of May, and 00003 on the 1st of June. A customer orders "
|
||
"you 6 boxes on the 11th of June. With the *FIFO* strategy selected, a "
|
||
"transfer is requested for the five boxes of 00001 and one of the boxes in "
|
||
"00002 because 00001 has entered your stock before the others. The box from "
|
||
"00002 is taken because it has the oldest enter date after 00001."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:60
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"So, for every order of a product with the *FIFO* strategy selected, Odoo "
|
||
"requests a transfer for the good that has been in your stock for the longest"
|
||
" period."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:64
|
||
msgid "Last In, First Out (LIFO)"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:66
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The same way as for FIFO, the **Last In, First Out** strategy is based on "
|
||
"moving products based on the date they entered the stock. Here, a demand for"
|
||
" some products triggers a removal rule that requests a transfer for the "
|
||
"lot/serial number that has entered your stock the last."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:70
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To better understand, let’s imagine three lots of screws in your warehouse. "
|
||
"Those three have the following numbers: 10001, 10002, 10003, each with 10 "
|
||
"screw boxes in it. 10001 has entered the stock on the 1st of June, 10002 on "
|
||
"the 3rd of June, and 10003 on the 6th of June. A customer orders 7 boxes on "
|
||
"the 8th of June. With the *LIFO* strategy selected, a transfer is requested "
|
||
"for seven boxes of 10003 because that lot is the last one to have entered "
|
||
"the stock."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:76
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"So, basically, for every order of a product with the *LIFO* strategy used, a"
|
||
" transfer for the last one to have entered the stock is requested."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:80
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"This strategy is banned in many countries and can lead to only have old or "
|
||
"obsolete products in your stock."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:84
|
||
msgid "First Expire, First Out (FEFO)"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:86
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The **First Expire, First Out** strategy is a bit different from the two "
|
||
"others. Here, it is the expiration date that is important and not the date "
|
||
"the product entered the stock."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:89
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Let’s imagine three lots of 6-eggs boxes (in this specific case, don’t "
|
||
"forget to use :doc:`units of measure <../../management/products/uom>`). "
|
||
"Those three have the following numbers: 20001, 20002, and 20003, each with 5"
|
||
" boxes in it. 20001 has entered the stock on the 1st of July and expires on "
|
||
"the 15th of July, 20002 on the 2nd and expires on the 14th of July, and "
|
||
"20003 on the 4th and expires on the 21st of July. A customer orders 6 boxes "
|
||
"on the 5th of July. With the *FEFO* strategy selected, a transfer is "
|
||
"requested for the five boxes of 20002 and one from 20001. The transfer for "
|
||
"all the boxes of the lot 20002 is because they have the closest expiration "
|
||
"date. The transfer also requests one box from 20001 because it’s the lot "
|
||
"that expires the sooner after 20002."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:98
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Then, you can remember that for every order of a product with the *FEFO* "
|
||
"strategy, a transfer is requested for the product that has the nearest "
|
||
"expiration date from the order date."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:102
|
||
msgid "Use Removal Strategies"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:104
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To identify some units from other ones, you need to track them, either by "
|
||
"*lot* or by *serial number*. To do so, go to :menuselection:`Configuration "
|
||
"--> Settings`. Then, activate *Storage Location*, *Multi-Steps Routes*, and "
|
||
"*Lots & Serial Numbers*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:113
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To work with the *FEFO* strategy, activate the *Expiration Dates* feature."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:115
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Next, you need to define your removal strategy, on *Product Categories* via "
|
||
":menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Product Categories`."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:123
|
||
msgid "FIFO (First In, First Out)"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:125
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"As said, a *FIFO* strategy implies that products stocked first move out "
|
||
"first. Companies should use that method if they are selling products with "
|
||
"short demand cycles, such as clothes, and to ensure they are not stuck with "
|
||
"outdated styles in stock."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:129
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"For this example, we created three lots of white shirts. Those are from the "
|
||
"All/Clothes category, where we put *FIFO* as the removal strategy. In our "
|
||
"stock location (WH/Stock), we now find the three lots available."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:137
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The lot 000001 contains 5 shirts, 000002 contains 3 shirts, and 000003 "
|
||
"contains 2. As it can be seen above, 000001 has entered the stock first. "
|
||
"Let’s create a sale order of six white shirts to check that products from "
|
||
"that lot are the first ones to move out."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:141
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"On the delivery order linked to the picking, you can see that the oldest lot"
|
||
" numbers have been reserved thanks to the *FIFO* strategy."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:149
|
||
msgid "LIFO (Last In, First Out)"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:151
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"With a *LIFO* strategy, that’s quite the opposite. In fact, the products "
|
||
"that are brought the last move out the first. It is mostly used in case of "
|
||
"products without a shelf life."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:154
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Even if our white shirts are clothes, we can say that they are timeless. So,"
|
||
" let’s use them to test our *LIFO* strategy. Once again, open the product "
|
||
"category via :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Product "
|
||
"Categories` and change the removal strategy to *LIFO*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:162
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, create a sale order for 4 white shirts and check that the reserved "
|
||
"products are from lots 000003 and 000002."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:170
|
||
msgid "Don’t forget that the *LIFO* strategy is banned in many countries!"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:173
|
||
msgid "FEFO (First Expiry, First Out)"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:175
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"With the *FEFO* strategy, the way products are picked is not based on the "
|
||
"reception date. In this particular case, they are dispatched according to "
|
||
"their expiration date."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:179
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To have more information about Expiration date, please have a look at "
|
||
":doc:`the related doc "
|
||
"<../../management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates>`."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:182
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"By activating *Expiration Dates*, it becomes possible to define different "
|
||
"dates on the serial/lot numbers to be used in *FEFO*. These dates can be set"
|
||
" by going to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Master Data --> Lots/Serial "
|
||
"Numbers`."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:190
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Lots are picked based on their removal date, from earliest to latest. Lots "
|
||
"without a removal date defined are picked after lots with removal dates."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:194
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Other dates are for informational and reporting purposes only. If not "
|
||
"removed from the stock, lots that are past the expiration dates may still be"
|
||
" picked for delivery orders!"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:197
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To use the *FEFO* strategy, once again go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> "
|
||
"Configuration --> Product Categories` and choose *FEFO* as the *Force "
|
||
"Removal Strategy*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:204
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"For this particular case, let’s use hand cream. As usual, we have three lots"
|
||
" of them."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:207
|
||
msgid "**Lot / Serial No**"
|
||
msgstr "** Партия / Номер **"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:207
|
||
msgid "**Product**"
|
||
msgstr "** Нет в **"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:207
|
||
msgid "**Expiration Date**"
|
||
msgstr "** Срок годности **"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:209
|
||
msgid "0000001"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:209
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:211
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:213
|
||
msgid "Hand Cream"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:209
|
||
msgid "09/30/2019"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:211
|
||
msgid "0000002"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:211
|
||
msgid "11/30/2019"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:213
|
||
msgid "0000003"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:213
|
||
msgid "10/31/2019"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:216
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When we realize a sale for 25 units of Hand Cream, we can see that the lot "
|
||
"numbers which have been automatically reserved by Odoo are the ones with the"
|
||
" closest expiration date, meaning 0000001 and 0000003."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Shipping"
|
||
msgstr "Доставка"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Shipping Operations"
|
||
msgstr "операции доставки"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:3
|
||
msgid "How to cancel a shipping request to a shipper?"
|
||
msgstr "Как отменить запрос на доставку перевозчику?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Odoo can handle various delivery methods, including third party shippers. "
|
||
"Odoo will be linked with the transportation company tracking system."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Odoo может обрабатывать различные способы доставки, включая сторонних "
|
||
"превизникив. Odoo будет связана с системой отслеживания транспортной "
|
||
"компании."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:12
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"It will allow you to manage the transport company, the real prices and the "
|
||
"destination."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Это позволит вам управлять транспортной компанией, реальными ценами и "
|
||
"назначению."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:15
|
||
msgid "You can easily cancel the request made to the carrier system."
|
||
msgstr "Вы можете легко отменить запрос, отправленный в системы перевозчика."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:18
|
||
msgid "How to cancel a shipping request?"
|
||
msgstr "Как отменить запрос на доставку?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:20
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If the delivery order is not **Validated**, then the request hasn't been "
|
||
"made. You can choose to cancel the delivery or to change the carrier."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Если заказ на доставку НЕ ** Подтверждено **, запрос не было сделано. Вы "
|
||
"можете отменить доставку или изменить перевозчика."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:24
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you have clicked on **Validate**, the request has been made and you "
|
||
"should have received the tracking number and the label. You can still cancel"
|
||
" the request. Simply click on the **Cancel** button next to the **Carrier "
|
||
"Tracking Ref**:"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Если вы нажали кнопку ** Подтвердить **, запрос был сделан, и вам нужно было"
|
||
" получить номер отслеживания и метку. Вы все еще можете отменить запрос. "
|
||
"Просто нажмите кнопку ** Отменить ** рядом с кнопкой ** Отслеживание "
|
||
"перевозчика **:"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:32
|
||
msgid "You will now see that the shipment has been cancelled."
|
||
msgstr "Теперь вы увидите, что доставка была отменена."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:37
|
||
msgid "You can now change the carrier if you wish."
|
||
msgstr "Теперь вы можете изменить перевозчика, если хотите."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:40
|
||
msgid "How to send a shipping request after cancelling one?"
|
||
msgstr "Как отправить запрос на доставку после отмены его?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:42
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"After cancelling the shipping request, you can change the carrier you want "
|
||
"to use. Confirm it by clicking on the **Send to shipper** button. You will "
|
||
"get a new tracking number and a new label."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"После отмены запроса на доставку вы можете изменить перевозчика, которого "
|
||
"хотите использовать. Подтвердите это, нажав кнопку ** Отправить отправителю "
|
||
"**. Вы получите новый номер отслеживания и новую метку."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:50
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:115
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:83
|
||
msgid ":doc:`invoicing`"
|
||
msgstr ":doc:`invoicing`"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:51
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:116
|
||
msgid ":doc:`multipack`"
|
||
msgstr ":doc:`multipack`"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:3
|
||
msgid "How to invoice the shipping cost to the customer?"
|
||
msgstr "Как зачесть стоимость доставки клиенту?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:8
|
||
msgid "There are two ways to invoice the shipping costs:"
|
||
msgstr "Существует два способа выставления счета за доставку:"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:10
|
||
msgid "Agree with the customer over a cost and seal it down in the sale order"
|
||
msgstr "Согласуйте с клиентом расходы и закрепите их в заказе на продажу."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:13
|
||
msgid "Invoice the real cost of the shipping."
|
||
msgstr "Выставления счета по фактической стоимости доставки"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:18
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To configure the price of your delivery methods, go to the **Inventory** "
|
||
"app, click on :menuselection:`Configuration --> Delivery --> Delivery "
|
||
"Methods`."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Чтобы настроить цену ваших методов доставки, перейдите к приложению ** "
|
||
"Состав **, нажмите на :menuselection:`Configuration --> Delivery --> "
|
||
"Delivery Methods`."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:21
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can manually set a price for the shipping: It can be fixed or based on "
|
||
"rules."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Вы можете вручную установить цену на доставку: она может быть исправлена или"
|
||
" основана на правилах."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:24
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Or you can use the transportation company computation system. Read the "
|
||
"document :doc:`../setup/third_party_shipper`"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Или вы можете использовать систему исчисления транспортировки компании. "
|
||
"Прочитайте документацию: doc: `../ setup / third_party_shipper`"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:28
|
||
msgid "How to invoice the shipping costs to the customer?"
|
||
msgstr "Как начислить расходы за доставку клиенту?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:31
|
||
msgid "Invoice the price set on the sale order"
|
||
msgstr "Установление цены счета-фактуры на заказ на продажу"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:33
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:55
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"On your sale order, choose the carrier that will be used. Click on "
|
||
"**Delivery Method** to choose the right one."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"В своем заказе на продажу выберите поставщика, который будет использоваться."
|
||
" Нажмите на ** Метод доставки **, чтобы выбрать правильный."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:39
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:36
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The price is computed when you **save** the sale order or when you click on "
|
||
"**Set price**."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Цена рассчитывается, когда вы ** храните ** заказ на продажу или нажимаете "
|
||
"** Установить цену **."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:42
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To invoice the price of the delivery charge on the sale order, click on "
|
||
"**Set price**, it will add a line with the name of the delivery method as a "
|
||
"product. It may vary from the real price."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Чтобы зачесть стоимость доставки в заказе на продажу, нажмите ** Установить "
|
||
"цену **, это придаст строку с названием метода доставки как товар. Он может "
|
||
"отличаться от реальной цены."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:46
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When you create the invoice, it will take the price set on the sale order."
|
||
msgstr "При создании счета-фактуры цена устанавливается в заказе на продажу."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:53
|
||
msgid "Invoice the real shipping costs"
|
||
msgstr "Выставления счета с реальными расходы на доставку"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:61
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The price is computed when you **save** the sale order. Confirm the sale "
|
||
"order and proceed to deliver the product."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Цена рассчитывается, когда вы ** храните ** заказ на продажу. Подтвердите "
|
||
"заказ на продажу и продолжайте доставлять товар."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:64
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The real shipping cost is computed when the delivery order is validated, you"
|
||
" can see the real cost in the chatter of the delivery order."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:70
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Go back to the sale order, the real cost is now added to the sale order."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Вернитесь к заказу на продажу, теперь реальные расходы добавляются к заказу "
|
||
"на продажу."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:76
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When you create the invoice, it will take the price computed by the carrier."
|
||
msgstr "При создании счета-фактуры цена исчисляется перевозчиком."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:83
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you split the delivery and make several ones, each delivery order will "
|
||
"add a line to the sale order."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Если вы разделили доставку и сделали несколько, каждый заказ на доставку "
|
||
"придаст строку к заказу на продажу."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:87
|
||
msgid ":doc:`../setup/third_party_shipper`"
|
||
msgstr ":doc:`../setup/third_party_shipper`"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:88
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:84
|
||
msgid ":doc:`labels`"
|
||
msgstr ":doc:`labels`"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:3
|
||
msgid "How to print shipping labels?"
|
||
msgstr "Как распечатать накладную?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Odoo can handle various delivery methods, including third party shippers "
|
||
"linked with the transportation company tracking system. It allows you to "
|
||
"manage the transport company, the real prices and the destination. And "
|
||
"finally, you will be able to print the shipping labels directly from Odoo."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Odoo может обрабатывать различные способы доставки, включая сторонних "
|
||
"поставщиков, связанных с системой отслеживания транспортной компании. Это "
|
||
"позволяет вам управлять транспортной компанией, реальными ценами и "
|
||
"назначению. И, наконец, вы сможете напечатать накладные прямо с Odoo."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:18
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:17
|
||
msgid "Install the shipper company connector module"
|
||
msgstr "Установите модуль интеграции с перевозчиком"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:20
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the **Inventory** module, click on :menuselection:`Configuration --> "
|
||
"Settings`. Under **Shipping Connectors**, flag the transportation companies "
|
||
"you want to integrate :"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"В модуле Состав нажмите :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`. В "
|
||
"разделе ** Интеграция с перевозчиком ** обозначьте транспортные компании, "
|
||
"которые вы хотите интегрировать:"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:27
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:26
|
||
msgid "Then click on **Apply**."
|
||
msgstr "Нажмите ** Применить **."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:30
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:34
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:33
|
||
msgid "Configure the delivery method"
|
||
msgstr "Настройте метод доставки"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:32
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:36
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:35
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To configure your delivery methods, go to the **Inventory** module, click on"
|
||
" :menuselection:`Configuration --> Delivery Methods`."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Чтобы настроить способы доставки, перейдите к модулю ** Состав **, нажмите "
|
||
":menuselection:`Configuration --> Delivery Methods`."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:35
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The delivery methods for the chosen shippers have been automatically "
|
||
"created."
|
||
msgstr "Методы доставки выбранных перевозчиков были автоматически созданы."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:41
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the **Pricing** tab, the name of the provider means that the delivery "
|
||
"will be handled and computed by the shipper system."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"На вкладке ** Цены ** название поставщика означает, что доставка будет "
|
||
"обрабатываться и вычисляться системой отправителя."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:44
|
||
msgid "The configuration of the shipper is split into two columns :"
|
||
msgstr "Настройка отправителя разделены на две колонки:"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:46
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The first one is linked to **your account** (develop key, password,...). For"
|
||
" more information, please refer to the provider website."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Первая связана с ** вашим учетом ** (ключ разработчика, пароль, ...). "
|
||
"Дополнительную информацию можно найти на веб-сайте поставщика."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:49
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:62
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The second column varies according to the **provider**. You can choose the "
|
||
"packaging type, the service type, the weight unit..."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Вторая колонка зависит от ** поставщика **. Вы можете выбрать тип упаковки, "
|
||
"тип сервиса, весовой блок ..."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:52
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:65
|
||
msgid "Uncheck **Test Mode** when you are done with the testings."
|
||
msgstr "Снимите флажок ** тестового режима **, когда закончите проверку."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:55
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:77
|
||
msgid "Company configuration"
|
||
msgstr "Настройка компании"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:57
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:79
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In order to compute the right price, the provider needs your company "
|
||
"information. Be sure your address and phone number are correctly encoded."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Чтобы вычислить правильную цену, поставщик нуждается в вашей информации о "
|
||
"компании. Убедитесь, что ваш адрес и номер телефона правильно закодированы."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:64
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:86
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To check your information, go to the **Settings** application and click on "
|
||
"**General Settings**. Click on the first link **Configure your company "
|
||
"data**."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Чтобы проверить свою информацию, перейдите к ** настроек ** и нажмите ** "
|
||
"Общие настройки **. Нажмите первую ссылку ** Настроить данные вашей компании"
|
||
" **."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:70
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:92
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The shipper companies need the weight of your product, otherwise the price "
|
||
"computation cannot be done."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Предприятия отправителя потребует веса вашей продукции, в противном случае "
|
||
"вычислить цену не получится."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:73
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Go the **Sales** module, click on :menuselection:`Sales --> Products`. Open "
|
||
"the products you want to ship and set a weight on it."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Зайдите к модулю ** Продажи **, нажмите на :menuselection:`Sales --> "
|
||
"Products`. Откройте товары, которые вы хотите отправить, и установите вес на"
|
||
" нем."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:80
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The weight on the product form is expressed in kilograms. Don't forget to do"
|
||
" the conversion if you are used to the imperial measurement system."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Вес на форме товара выражается в килограммах. Не забывайте делать "
|
||
"преобразования, если вы привыкли к империческое измерительной системы."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:85
|
||
msgid "How to print shipping labels ?"
|
||
msgstr "Как напечатать накладные?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:87
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The delivery order created from the sale order will take the shipping "
|
||
"information from it, but you can change the carrier if you want to."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Заказ на доставку, созданное по заказу на продажу, примет информацию о "
|
||
"доставке, но вы можете изменить перевозчика, если хотите."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:90
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:135
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you create a delivery transfer from the inventory module, you can add the"
|
||
" third party shipper in the additional info tab."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Если вы создаете передачу доставки из модуля состава, вы можете добавить "
|
||
"стороннего перевозчика на вкладке дополнительной информации."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:96
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Click on **Validate** to receive the tracking number and **the label(s)**."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Нажмите ** Подтвердить **, чтобы получить номер отслеживания и ** накладную "
|
||
"(и) **."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:98
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:151
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The label to stick on your package is available in the history underneath :"
|
||
msgstr "Наклейка на упаковке доступна в истории под названием"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:104
|
||
msgid "Click on it to open the document and print it :"
|
||
msgstr "Нажмите на нее, чтобы открыть документ и распечатать его:"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:110
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you are doing multi-packages shippings, most of the time, there will be "
|
||
"one label per package. Each label will appear in the delivery history."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Если вы осуществляете перемещение нескольких пакетов, в большинстве случаев "
|
||
"на каждом пакете будет одна метка. Каждая метка будет отображаться в истории"
|
||
" доставки."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:3
|
||
msgid "How to manage multiple packs for the same delivery order?"
|
||
msgstr "Как управлять несколькими пакетами для одного заказа на доставку?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"By default, Odoo considers that your delivery is composed of one package. "
|
||
"But you can easily ship your deliveries with more than one package. It is "
|
||
"fully integrated with the third-party shippers."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"По умолчанию Odoo считает, что ваша доставка состоит из одного пакета. Но вы"
|
||
" можете легко доставить свои поставки более чем на один пакет. Он полностью "
|
||
"интегрирован со сторонними поставщиками."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:15
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To configure the use of packages, go to the menu :menuselection:`Inventory "
|
||
"--> Configuration --> Settings`. Locate the **Packages** section and tick "
|
||
"**Record packages used on packing: pallets, boxes,...**"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Чтобы настроить использование пакетов, перейдите к меню "
|
||
":menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`. Найдите раздел **"
|
||
" Упаковка ** и обозначьте ** Записать пакеты, используемые на упаковке: "
|
||
"поддоны, коробки ... **"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:23
|
||
msgid "Click on **Apply** when you are done."
|
||
msgstr "Нажмите ** Применить **, когда вы закончите."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:29
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:77
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:110
|
||
msgid "Sale order"
|
||
msgstr "Заказ на продажу"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:34
|
||
msgid "Click on a **Delivery Method** to choose the right one."
|
||
msgstr "Нажмите на ** Метод доставки **, чтобы выбрать правильный."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:40
|
||
msgid "Multi-packages Delivery"
|
||
msgstr "Доставка нескольких пакетов"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:42
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The delivery created from the sale order will take the shipping information "
|
||
"from it."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Доставка, созданная по заказу на продажу, примет информацию о доставке."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:48
|
||
msgid "From here, you can split your delivery into multiple packages."
|
||
msgstr "Отсюда можно разделить вашу доставку на несколько пакетов."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:50
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Choose the quantity you want to put in the first pack in the **Done** "
|
||
"column, then click on the link **Put in Pack**."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Выберите количество, которое вы хотите разместить в первом пакете в столбце "
|
||
"** Готово **, после чего нажмите на ссылку ** Упаковать **."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:56
|
||
msgid "It will automatically create a pack with the requested quantity."
|
||
msgstr "Это автоматически создаст пакет с запрашиваемым количеством."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:58
|
||
msgid "Do the same steps for the other pieces you want to pack in."
|
||
msgstr "Сделайте те же шаги для других позиций, которые вы хотите запаковать."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:63
|
||
msgid "Click on **Validate** when you are done."
|
||
msgstr "Нажмите ** Подтвердить **, когда вы закончите."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:66
|
||
msgid "Multi-packages with a 3rd party-shipper"
|
||
msgstr "Несколько пакетов с посторонним перевозчиком"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:68
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once the delivery order is validated, you will receive the tracking number. "
|
||
"The **carrier Tracking ref** field will automatically be filled. Click on "
|
||
"the **Tracking** button to check your delivery on the provider website."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"После того, как заказ на доставку будет подтверждено, вы получите номер "
|
||
"отслеживания. Поле ** отслеживания перевозчика ** автоматически заполняется."
|
||
" Нажмите кнопку ** Отслеживание **, чтобы проверить свою доставку на сайте "
|
||
"поставщика."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:76
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The **labels** to stick on your packages are available in the history "
|
||
"underneath:"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"** Метки **, которых следует придерживаться в ваших пакетах, доступны в "
|
||
"истории:"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Shipping Setup"
|
||
msgstr "Настройка доставки"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:3
|
||
msgid "How to setup a delivery method?"
|
||
msgstr "Как установить метод доставки?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Odoo can handle various delivery methods, but it is not activated by "
|
||
"default. Delivery methods can be used for your sale orders, your deliveries "
|
||
"but also on your e-commerce."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Odoo может обрабатывать различные способы доставки, но по умолчанию они не "
|
||
"активированы. Методы доставки могут использоваться для заказов на продажу, "
|
||
"ваших поставок, а также для вашей электронной коммерции."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:12
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Delivery methods allow you to manage the transport company, the price and "
|
||
"the destination. You can even integrate Odoo with external shippers to "
|
||
"compute the real price and the packagings."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Методы доставки позволяют вам управлять транспортной компанией, цене и "
|
||
"назначению. Вы даже можете интегрировать Odoo с внешними грузоотправителями,"
|
||
" чтобы вычислить реальную цену и тару."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:20
|
||
msgid "Install the inventory module"
|
||
msgstr "Установите модуль состава"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:22
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Delivery methods are handled by the **Delivery costs** module. Go to "
|
||
"**Apps** and search for the module. You should remove the **Apps** filter in"
|
||
" order to see it :"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Методы доставки обрабатываются модулем ** Расходы на доставку **. Перейдите "
|
||
"к ** программ ** и найдите модуль. Чтобы увидеть, следует изъять фильтр ** "
|
||
"Программы **:"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:30
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:29
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you want to integrate delivery methods in your e-commerce, you'll have to"
|
||
" install the **eCommerce Delivery** module."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Если вы хотите интегрировать методы доставки в свою электронную коммерцию, "
|
||
"вам придется установить модуль ** Доставка электронной коммерции **."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:39
|
||
msgid "First set a name and a transporter company."
|
||
msgstr "Сначала установите название и транспортную компанию."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:44
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Then you'll have to set the pricing. It can be fixed or based on rules."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Тогда вам придется установить цену. Она может быть фиксированной или "
|
||
"основанной на правилах."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:46
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If the price is fixed, tick **Fixed price**. You'll just have to define the "
|
||
"price. If you want the delivery to be free above a certain amount, tick the "
|
||
"option **Free if Order total is more than** and set a price."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Если цена установлена, нажмите ** Фиксированная цена **. Вам просто придется"
|
||
" определить цену. Если вы хотите, чтобы доставка была бесплатной выше "
|
||
"определенной суммы, отметьте пункт ** Свободная, если общая сумма заказов "
|
||
"превышает ** и установите цену."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:54
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If the price varies according to rules, tick **Based on Rules**. Click on "
|
||
"**add an item to a pricing rule**. Choose a condition based on either the "
|
||
"weight, the volume, the price or the quantity."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Если цена изменяется в соответствии с правилами, отметьте пункт ** На основе"
|
||
" правил **. Нажмите на ** добавить элемент в правила ценообразования **. "
|
||
"Выберите условие, в зависимости от веса, объема, цены или количества."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:61
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Finally you can limit the delivery method to a few destinations. The limit "
|
||
"can be applied to some countries, states or even zip codes. This feature "
|
||
"limits the list of countries on your e-commerce."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Наконец, вы можете ограничить способ доставки несколькими пунктами "
|
||
"назначения. Ограничения можно применить в некоторые страны, районов или даже"
|
||
" почтовых индексов. Эта функция ограничивает список стран в вашей "
|
||
"электронной торговли."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:69
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can integrate Odoo with external shippers in order to compute the real "
|
||
"price and packagings, and handle the printing the shipping labels. See "
|
||
":doc:`third_party_shipper`"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Вы можете интегрировать Odoo с внешними отправителями, чтобы вычислить "
|
||
"реальную цену и упаковку, а также обрабатывать печать этикеток. Смотрите: "
|
||
"doc: `third_party_shipper`"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:74
|
||
msgid "Delivery process"
|
||
msgstr "процесс доставки"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:82
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can now choose the **Delivery Method** on your sale order. If you want "
|
||
"to invoice the price of the delivery charge on the sale order, click on "
|
||
"**Set price**, it will add a line with the name of the delivery method as a "
|
||
"product."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Теперь вы можете выбрать ** Метод доставки ** в своем заказе на продажу. "
|
||
"Если вы хотите начислить стоимость доставки в заказе на продажу, нажмите ** "
|
||
"Установить цену **, она придаст строку с названием метода доставки как "
|
||
"товар."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:88
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:130
|
||
msgid "Delivery"
|
||
msgstr "Доставка"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:90
|
||
msgid "You can add or change the delivery method on the delivery itself."
|
||
msgstr "Вы можете добавить или изменить способ доставки на саму доставку."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:95
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"On the delivery, check the **Carrier Information**. The carrier is the "
|
||
"chosen delivery method."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"На доставке проверьте ** Количество перевозчика **. Перевозчик - это "
|
||
"выбранный метод доставки."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:99
|
||
msgid ":doc:`third_party_shipper`"
|
||
msgstr ":doc:`third_party_shipper`"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:100
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:158
|
||
msgid ":doc:`../operation/invoicing`"
|
||
msgstr ":doc:`../operation/invoicing`"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:3
|
||
msgid "How to get DHL credentials for integration with Odoo?"
|
||
msgstr "Как получить учетные данные DHL для интеграции с Odoo?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:5
|
||
msgid "In order to use the Odoo DHL API, you will need:"
|
||
msgstr "Чтобы пользоваться API Odoo DHL, вам потребуется:"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:7
|
||
msgid "A DHL.com SiteID"
|
||
msgstr "DHL.com SiteID"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:9
|
||
msgid "A DHL Password"
|
||
msgstr "пароль DHL"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:11
|
||
msgid "A DHL Account Number"
|
||
msgstr "Артикул DHL"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:15
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Getting SiteID and password for countries other than United States (UK and "
|
||
"Rest of the world)"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Получение SiteID и пароль для других стран, кроме США (Великобритания и "
|
||
"остальные страны мира)."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:17
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You should contact DHL account manager and request integration for XML "
|
||
"Express API. The presales should provide you live credentials."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Вы должны связаться с менеджером аккаунта DHL и попросить интеграцию в API "
|
||
"XML Express. Предыдущие номера должны предоставить вам действительны учетные"
|
||
" данные."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:20
|
||
msgid "Getting SiteID and Password for United States"
|
||
msgstr "Получение SiteID и пароля для Соединенных Штатов"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:22
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You need to write to xmlrequests@dhl.com along with your full Account "
|
||
"details like account number, region, address, etc. to get API Access."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Чтобы получить API-доступ, нужно написать на адрес xmlrequests@dhl.com "
|
||
"вместе с полными данными учетной записи, например номер учета, регионе, "
|
||
"адрес и т."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:24
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In meantime, for testing the solution, you can use the tests credentials as "
|
||
"given in the demo data:"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Между тем, для тестирования решения можно использовать тесты учетных данных,"
|
||
" как указано в демонстрационных данных:"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:26
|
||
msgid "**SiteID**: CustomerTest"
|
||
msgstr "**SiteID**: CustomerTest"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:28
|
||
msgid "**Password**: alkd89nBV"
|
||
msgstr "** Пароль **: alkd89nBV"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:30
|
||
msgid "**DHL Account Number**: 803921577"
|
||
msgstr "** Артикул DHL **: 803921577"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:3
|
||
msgid "How to integrate a third party shipper?"
|
||
msgstr "Как настроить стороннего перевозчика в Odoo?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Odoo can handle various delivery methods, including third party shippers. "
|
||
"Odoo can be linked with the transportation company tracking system. It will "
|
||
"allow you to manage the transport company, the real prices and the "
|
||
"destination."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Odoo может обрабатывать различные способы доставки, включая сторонних "
|
||
"перевозчиков. Odoo можно связать с системой отслеживания транспортной "
|
||
"компании. Это позволит вам управлять транспортной компанией, реальными "
|
||
"ценами и назначению."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:19
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the inventory module, click on :menuselection:`Configuration --> "
|
||
"Settings`. Under **Shipping Connectors**, flag the transportation companies "
|
||
"you want to integrate :"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"В модуле Состав нажмите :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`. В "
|
||
"разделе ** Интеграция с перевозчиком ** поставьте флажки транспортных "
|
||
"компаний, которые вы хотите интегрировать:"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:38
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The delivery methods for the chosen shippers have been automatically "
|
||
"created. Most of the time, there will be **2** delivery methods for the same"
|
||
" provider: one for **international** shipping and the other for **domestic**"
|
||
" shipping."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Методы доставки выбранных грузоотправителей были автоматически созданы. В "
|
||
"большинстве случаев для одного поставщика будет ** два ** способы доставки: "
|
||
"один для ** международной ** доставки и другой для ** внутренней ** "
|
||
"доставки."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:43
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can create other methods with the same provider with other "
|
||
"configuration, for example the **Packaging Type**."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Вы можете создавать другие методы с тем же перевозчиком с другим настройкам,"
|
||
" например ** тип упаковки **."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:46
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can change the **Name** of the delivery method. This is the name that "
|
||
"will appear on your ecommerce."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Вы можете изменить ** название ** метода доставки. Это название, которое "
|
||
"будет отображаться на электронной коммерции."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:49
|
||
msgid "Flag **Shipping enabled** when you are ready to use it."
|
||
msgstr "Отметьте ** Доставка включена **, когда вы готовы к ее использованию."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:54
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the pricing tab, the name of the provider chosen under the **Price "
|
||
"computation** means that the pricing will be computed by the shipper system."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"На вкладке ценообразования имя провайдера, выбранного под ** Расчет цены **,"
|
||
" означает, что цена будет вычислена системой перевозчика."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:57
|
||
msgid "The configuration of the shipper is split into two columns:"
|
||
msgstr "Настройка перевозчика разделена на две колонки:"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:59
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The first one is linked to **your account** (developer key, password,...). "
|
||
"For more information, please refer to the provider website."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Первая связана с ** вашим учетом ** (ключ разработчика, пароль, ...). "
|
||
"Дополнительную информацию можно найти на веб-сайте поставщика."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:67
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Finally you can limit the delivery method to a few destinations. You can "
|
||
"limit it to some countries, states or even zip codes. This feature limits "
|
||
"the list of countries on your e-commerce. It is useful for the domestic "
|
||
"providers. For example, USPS US only delivers from the United States to the "
|
||
"United States."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Наконец, вы можете ограничить способ доставки несколькими пунктами "
|
||
"назначения. Вы можете ограничить его некоторыми странами или даже почтовыми "
|
||
"кодами. Эта функция ограничивает список стран в вашей электронной торговли."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:95
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Go the menu :menuselection:`Sales --> Sales --> Products`. Open the products"
|
||
" you want to ship and set a weight on it."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Откройте меню :menuselection:`Sales --> Sales --> Products`. Откройте "
|
||
"товары, которые вы хотите отправить, и установите на них вес."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:102
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The weight on the product form is expressed in kilograms. Don't forget to "
|
||
"make the conversion if you are used to the imperial measurement system."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Вес на форме товара выражается в килограммах. Не забудьте сделать "
|
||
"преобразования, если вы привыкли к империческое измерительной системы."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:115
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can now choose the carrier on your sale order. Click on **Delivery "
|
||
"method** to choose the right one."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Теперь вы можете выбрать перевозчика в своем заказе на продажу. Нажмите ** "
|
||
"Метод доставки **, чтобы выбрать нужный."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:118
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The price is computed when you save the sale order or when you click on "
|
||
"**Set price**."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Цена рассчитывается, когда вы сохраняете заказ на продажу или нажимаете ** "
|
||
"Установить цену **."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:121
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you want to invoice the price of the delivery charge on the sale order, "
|
||
"click on **Set price**, it will add a line with the name of the delivery "
|
||
"method as a product. It may vary from the real price."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Если вы хотите начислить стоимость доставки в заказе на продажу, нажмите ** "
|
||
"Установить цену **, она придаст строку с названием метода доставки как "
|
||
"товар. Он может отличаться от реальной цены."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:125
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Otherwise, the real price (computed when the delivery is validated) will "
|
||
"automatically be added to the invoice. For more information, please read the"
|
||
" document :doc:`../operation/invoicing`"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"В противном случае реальная цена (рассчитана, когда доставка проверена) "
|
||
"будет автоматически добавлена в счет-фактуру. Для подробной информации "
|
||
"прочитайте документацию: doc: `../ operation / invoicing`"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:132
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The delivery created from the sale order will take the shipping information "
|
||
"from it. You can change the carrier if you want to."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Доставка, созданная по заказу на продажу, примет информацию о доставке. Вы "
|
||
"можете изменить перевозчика, если хотите."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:141
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The weight is computed based on the products weights. The shipping cost will"
|
||
" be computed once the transfer is validated."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Вес вычисляется на основе весовых товаров. Стоимость доставки будет "
|
||
"рассчитана после проверки перемещения."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:144
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Click on **Validate** to receive the tracking number. The **Carrier Tracking"
|
||
" ref** field will automatically be filled. Click on the **Tracking** button "
|
||
"to check your delivery on the provider website."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Нажмите ** Подтвердить **, чтобы получить номер отслеживания. Поле ** "
|
||
"Отслеживание перевозчика ** автоматически заполняется. Нажмите кнопку ** "
|
||
"Отслеживание **, чтобы проверить свою доставку на сайте поставщика услуг."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:159
|
||
msgid ":doc:`../operation/labels`"
|
||
msgstr ":doc:`../operation/labels`"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:3
|
||
msgid "How to get UPS credentials for integration with Odoo?"
|
||
msgstr "Как получить учетные данные UPS для интеграции с Odoo?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:5
|
||
msgid "In order to use the Odoo UPS API, you will need:"
|
||
msgstr "Для того, чтобы воспользоваться API UPS для Odoo, вам понадобится:"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:7
|
||
msgid "A UPS.com user ID and password"
|
||
msgstr "ID пользователя UPS.com и пароль"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:9
|
||
msgid "A UPS account number"
|
||
msgstr "Артикул UPS"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:11
|
||
msgid "An Access Key"
|
||
msgstr "ключ доступа"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:13
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"An Access Key is a 16 character alpha-numeric code that allows access to the"
|
||
" UPS Developer Kit API Development and Production servers."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Ключ доступа - это 16-значный буквенно-цифровой код, позволяющий получить "
|
||
"доступ к серверам разработки API разработчика UPS."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:17
|
||
msgid "Create a UPS Account"
|
||
msgstr "Создайте учет UPS"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:19
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Note that only customers located in the US can open a UPS account online. If"
|
||
" you are located outside the US, you will need to contact UPS Customer "
|
||
"Service in order to to open an account."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Обратите внимание, что только клиенты, расположенные в США, могут открыть "
|
||
"аккаунт UPS онлайн. Если вы находитесь за пределами США, вам придется "
|
||
"обратиться в службу поддержки UPS, чтобы открыть учет."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:23
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can read additional information about opening a UPS account on the their"
|
||
" website, on the page, `How to Open a UPS Account Online "
|
||
"<https://www.ups.com/content/us/en/resources/sri/openaccountonline.html?srch_pos=2&srch_phr=open+ups+account>`_"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Вы можете ознакомиться с дополнительной информацией об открытии учета UPS на"
|
||
" своем веб-сайте на странице `Как открыть аккаунт UPS онлайн "
|
||
"<https://www.ups.com/content/us/en/resources/sri/openaccountonline.html?srch_pos=2&srch_phr=open+ups+account>"
|
||
" `_"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:27
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you don't already have a UPS account, you can create one along with your "
|
||
"online profile by following these steps:"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Если у вас еще нет аккаунта UPS, вы можете создать его вместе с вашим "
|
||
"онлайновым профилем, выполнив следующие действия."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:30
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"1. Access the UPS.com web site at `www.ups.com <http://www.ups.com/>`__, and"
|
||
" click the **New User** link at the top of the page."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"1. Получите доступ к веб-сайту UPS.com на `www.ups.com <http://www.ups.com/>"
|
||
" `__, и нажмите на ссылку ** Новый пользователь ** вверху страницы."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:34
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"2. Click the **Register for MyUPS** button, and follow the prompts to "
|
||
"complete the registration process."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"2. Нажмите кнопку ** Регистрация для MyUPS **, и следуйте инструкциям, чтобы"
|
||
" завершить процесс регистрации."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:37
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you already have a UPS account, you can add it to your online profile as "
|
||
"follows:"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Если у вас уже есть учетная запись UPS, вы можете добавить его в свой "
|
||
"онлайн-профиля следующим образом:"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:39
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Log in to the `UPS.com website <http://www.ups.com/>`_) using your UPS.com "
|
||
"User ID and Password."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:41
|
||
msgid "Click the **My UPS** tab."
|
||
msgstr "Перейдите на вкладку ** Мой UPS **."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:43
|
||
msgid "Click the **Account Summary** link."
|
||
msgstr "Нажмите на ссылку ** Резюме учетной записи **."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:45
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"4. Click the **Add an Existing UPS Account** link in the **UPS Account "
|
||
"Details** section of the page."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"4. Нажмите на ссылку ** Добавить существующий аккаунт UPS ** в разделе "
|
||
"страницы ** Информация об учетной записи UPS **."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:48
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"5. In the **Add New Account** screen, enter the **UPS Account Number**, "
|
||
"**Account Name**, and **Postal Code** fields. The country defaults to United"
|
||
" States.q"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"5. На экране ** Добавить новую учетную запись ** введите ** Номер учетной "
|
||
"записи **, ** Название аккаунта **, а также ** Почтовый код **. Страна по "
|
||
"умолчанию стоит как Соединенные Штаты."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:52
|
||
msgid "Click the **Next** button to continue."
|
||
msgstr "Нажмите кнопку ** Далее **, чтобы продолжить."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:55
|
||
msgid "Get an Access Key"
|
||
msgstr "Получите ключ доступа"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:57
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"After you have added your UPS account number to your user profile you can "
|
||
"request an Access Key from UPS using the steps below:"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"После того, как вы добавили свой номер учетной записи UPS в свой профиль, вы"
|
||
" можете заказать ключ доступа UPS, воспользовавшись приведенными ниже "
|
||
"инструкциями."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:60
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Go to the `UPS Developer Kit web page "
|
||
"<https://www.ups.com/upsdeveloperkit?loc=en_US>`_"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:61
|
||
msgid "Log into UPS.com with your user ID and password"
|
||
msgstr "Войдите на UPS.com с вашим ID и паролем"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:62
|
||
msgid "Click on the link **Request an access key**."
|
||
msgstr "Нажмите на ссылку ** Запрос на ключ доступа **."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:63
|
||
msgid "Verify your contact information"
|
||
msgstr "Проверьте свою контактную информацию"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:64
|
||
msgid "Click the **Request Access Key** button."
|
||
msgstr "Нажмите на кнопку ** Запрос на ключ доступа **."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:66
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The **Access Key** will be provided to you on the web page, and an email "
|
||
"with the Access Key will be sent to the email address of the primary "
|
||
"contact."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"** Ключ доступа ** будет предоставлено вам на веб-странице, а электронное "
|
||
"письмо с ключом доступа будет отправлено на адрес электронной почты "
|
||
"основного контакта."
|